Home

User's Manual

1. Illustration FPO C14RM Reference measurements for wiring 3 5 0 138 10 039 Approx 100 0 3 937 60 0 2 362 25 0 0 984 iw 60 0 2 362 A S EXPANSION CONNECTOR Q eo E pa e 5 L cz I 5 5 8 a t Y 2 S 9 7 5 0 295 DIN rail DIN EN50022 35 1 378 attachment gap unit mm in 13 3 Dimensions FPO 18 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit 13 1 3 FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP E16T E16P E8X E8YT E8YP E32T E32P E16X E16YT E16YP Illustration FPO C16T Reference measurements for wiring 18 0 709 3 5 0 138 25 0 0 984 18 0709 Approx 78 0 3 071 R 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 A coo US e e n g g 5 5 e e Oo Oo Y gt lt 3 5 0 138 unit mm in 13 1 4 FPO C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T3
2. Ee 10 16 Input 14 Output 12 nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 10 8 8 nput 6 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 _ 14 16 Input 16 Output 14 nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 14 8 8 Ej nput 8 Output 6 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 3 10 16 8 Input 18 Output 16 nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 Input 4 Output 4 10 8 8 8 ulis za alie nput 6 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 14 16 8 Input 20 Output 18 oF nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 Input 4 Output 4 e 14 8 8 8 nput 8 Output 6 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 10 M 16 16 Input 22 Output 20 nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 10 16 8 8 nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 Input 4 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 14 4 16 dp 16 Input 24 Output 22 XN nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 14 16 8 8 t 5 illus nail oe nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 Input 4 Output 4 nput 4
3. Optional Memory FPO 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 1 Control Unit Types C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM All control unit types C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM terminal type connector type DE E oa A TH Sali EXPANSION P O L S m CONNECTOR Fay z RUN an E lem 2 8 E 7 PROG y I A se m e alle B3 9 5 fa Iga P NI hsm t 7 B C16T C16CT C32T C32CT Control unit with RS232C port C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP 9 amp amp FPO Optional Memory 2 1 Parts and Terminology 0 2 6 3 Status indicator LEDs display the operation mode and error statuses section 2 1 1 1 2 Mode switch changes the operation mode section 2 1 1 2 8 9 49 68 Tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool section 2 1 1 3 4 6 Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the power supply cable AFP0581 that comes with the unit Input terminal 9 pin 6 Output terminal 9 pin The input and output terminals 5 and use a termin
4. m Notes e The two COM terminals of input terminal X0 7 are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Optional Memory 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 5 C32T C32CT T32CT X1 C32T C32CT X8 X9 X F RUN 18 d n y d off Es Em bre ese oe 5 COM Y y OM PROG Wo7 Ye F a Output Output YO Y1 oo Y8 Y9 Oo Oo J EN 4 Load Load Load ag fos s Load Load Load 9 ea Load Load Load RN AUC Load Load Load ii Afe O x Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals X0 7 and X8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output termi
5. CoBo8oGo u n n n _ o o o o nbo nnn E16YT E16YP 44 nunonnon uBofintu nbotn n ubu n n 00000000 CONNECTOR FPO Expansion I O Units 3 1 Parts and Terminology CD Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the power supply cable AFP0581 that comes with the unit 2 Input terminal 9 pin 3 Output terminal 9 pin The input and output terminals 2 and 8 use a terminal block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co product number 1840434 section 7 6 Input connector 9 pin 6 Output connector 9 pin The input and output connectors 5 and 6 use a connector made by Molex Japan Co product number 51067 0900 section 7 7 2 03 Input connector 10 pin 43 Output connector 10 pin 9 42 Input connector 10 pin x 2 Output connector 10 pin x 2 Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 7 to 2 section 7 8 48 48 Expansion hook is used to secure expansion units Expansion connector connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the expansion I O unit section 6 1 4 DIN rail attachment le
6. 4 7 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block 4 7 4 4 Sequence of Turning on Power 65 4 9 4 5 Operation When Power Supply 4 10 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 0 00 cece eee 4 11 4 6 1 Recognizing the Address 4 11 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O 4 12 4 7 Judging Errors from the Error 4 13 4 8 Judging Errors Address 4 14 Chapter 5 I O Allocation Beal erc E Do OR EU eS 5 39 5 2 CONO UNIF 3 e etus Cos mcm ure eoe Eee vd etu OU 5 4 53 Expansion O UNIE iuis een uev seg eee geo ee dans 5 5 Chapter6 Installation 6 1 Adding Expansion Units guod E EE REC ERU Geen RES 6 3 6 2 Important Notes outer RU Ebr RD EL edo E 6 5 6 3 Attachment to DIN Rails 0 eee eee 6 8 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 9 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 10 Chapter 7 Wiring 7 1 altety Instrictions oh Tu RE nre EROR ER teque ek dg 7 3 vii Table of Contents FPO 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 1 1 Interlock Circuit en a
7. e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 117 Num bas Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F351 Floating FMIN 1 S2 D Searches the minimum value in the real number 8 P351 point type PFMIN data table between the area selected with 91 and data mini S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address mum value relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F352 Floating FMEAN 1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the real 8 P352 point type PFMEAN number data from the area selected with S1 to data total and S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the mean values D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 F353 Floating FSORT S1 S2 53 The real number data from the area speciified by 8 P353 point type PFSORT S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the data sort smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F354 Scaling of FSCAL S1 S2 D Scaling linearization on a real number data table 12 P354 realnumber PFSCAL is performed and the output Y to an input value data X is calculated Time series processing instruction F355 PID PID S PID processing is performed depending on the 4 processing control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the 5
8. Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F11 Block copy COPY S D1 D2 The data of S is transferred to the all area 7 P11 PCOPY between D1 and D2 F12 Data read ICRD 1 S2 D The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC 11 P12 from IC PICRD card or ROM specified by S1 and S2 are F12 card ROM ICRD transferred to the area startign at D F13 Data write to ICWT 1 92 D The data specified by S1 and S2 are transferred 11 P13 IC card ROM PICWT to the IC card expansion memory area or ROM P13 PICWT starting at D F14 Program PGRD S The program specified using S is transferred into 3 P14 read from IC PPGRD the CPU from IC memory card and executes it memory card F15 16 bit data XCH D1 D2 D1 5 D2 D2 5 D1 5 P15 exchange PXCH F16 32 bit data DXCH D1 D2 D1 1 D1 5 D2 1 D2 5 P16 exchange PDXCH D2 1 D2 5 D1 1 D1 F17 Higher lower SWAP D The higher byte and lower byte of D are 3 P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP exchanged data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 D2 D3 Exchange the data between D1 and D2 with the 7 P18 block PBXCH data specified by D3 exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction specified 3 jump by S and continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions F20 16 bit data S D D S 2 D 5 P20 addition P F21 32 bit data D S D D 1 D S 1 S 2 D 1 D 7 P21 addition PD F22 16 bit data 1
9. 1 8 18 8 7 Rewrite Function During eee 8 19 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite 8 19 8 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible 8 20 8 7 8 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN 8 22 8 7 4 Changing Modes in FP Programmer 8 23 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 24 8 8 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer 8 24 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area 8 25 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output 8 28 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only 8 29 Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9A Outline of Functions dese vede x e A ee eek ur E 9 3 9 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter 9 3 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter 9 4 9 2 Specifications and Restricted 8 16 9 5 9 2 1 Specifications as estas 9 5 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions 0 cee eee eee 9 7 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 9 9 3 1 X Outline of High speed Counter Function
10. eS Notes e When peeling the seal on the side of the initial lot products the shaded part is exposed Cut off the shaded part with a pair of nippers or similar tool so that the internal connector is exposed WA Shaded part DUNS Cut here e When removing the shaded part use a sharp cutting object making sure that the shaded part is removed leaving a smooth surface Note that failure to remove the shaded part completely can result in damage to the connector w next page FPO Installation Adding Expansion Units 6 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver 2 Expansion hook Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit 3 and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units r Expansion unit Control unit Press down the expansion hooks raised in step 2 to secure the unit 4 FPO Installation 6 2 Important Notes 6 2 Important Notes Please read the following notes carefully before the installation of your FPO ge Notes Avoid installing the unit in the following locations Ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 5
11. FPO Precautions During Programming 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 1 Index Registers Like other registers index registers have two points IX and IY for reading and writing 16 bit data Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is also called index modification AY il Example Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register RO H Fo MV DT100 IXDTO Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of IX with DTO acting as a base For example when IX contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when IX is K20 the destination will be DT20 In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT IXWXO IXWY1 IXWRO IXSVO IXEV2 IXDT100 Constants can also be modified IXK10 IXH1001 An index register cannot modify another index register IXIX When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with IX In this case IX and IY are handled together as 32 bit data
12. I 5 6 kQ m A X2n O EE ry Internal L circuit d D ue T 24V DC COM gt Note e Q l Output side 1e I Internal ie e e Load 9 circuit cw oe NS 1 l Y2n Internal gt i e e Load 9 circuit ML oo o 9 a 24 V DC External power supply and load voltage Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 11 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load voltage 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be connected FPO E16T E32T e e QUO e Internal S circuit ES PT e e gt e 5 6 kQ NB l X21 UNS 4 e Internal sm circuit irr 1kQ LI 5 6 kQ A x2n me a Internal job AL 1kQ 24VDC circuit zv uc te pn 1 Note 1 COM N e e T L p Internal 5 r 9 Y20 Load
13. X2 Near home input CW Pulse input Driver YO output ee QT cow 4 input d X2 or other desired input can be specified for the near home input Y4 or other desired output can be specified for the relay switching At this time the relay must be switched earlier by the amount of its operation time Caution when using a double pulse input driver When using the FPO pulse outputs YO and Y1 for direct connection to the CW input and CCW input of a driver the counter elapsed values for the separate channels chO and ch1 increase and decrease in response to the individual outputs The elapsed values can thus be sent to the program as necessary FPO Driver CW input YO L CCW input Y1 gt High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function Positioning control instruction F168 Automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table 8 HDF FO Mv H102 DT100 FO MV K500 DT101 FO MV K5000 DT102 F1 DMV K10000 DT104 FO MV K200 DT103 FO MV DT106 es ee c 3 3 F168 SPD1 DT100 HO Generates a pulse from output YO at an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 200 ms and a movement am
14. e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 12 E16YP E16YP Output Output ae 2 21 HEH g 28 29 Load Load Load a Le E Load Load Load T T ao Load Load Load 5 Fait Load Load Load 1 5 5 1 x Notes e The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e Thetwo terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will
15. e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 81 Num bas Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F113 Left shift of WBSL D1 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to 5 P113 one hexade PWBSL the left cimal digit 4 bit FIFO instructions F115 FIFO buffer FIFT n D The n words beginning from D are defined in the 5 P115 define PFIFT buffer F116 Data read FIFR S D The oldest data beginning from S that was written 5 P116 from FIFO PFIFR to the buffer is read and stored in D buffer F117 Data write FIFW S D The data of S is written to the buffer starting from 5 P117 into FIFO PFIFW D buffer Basic function instructions F118 UP DOWN UDC S D Counts up or down from the value preset in S and 5 counter stores the elapsed value in D F119 Left right LRSR D1 D2 Shifts one bit to the left or right with the area 5 shift register between D1 and D2 as the register Data rotate instructions F120 16 bit data ROR D n Rotate the n bits in data of D to the right 5 P120 right rotate PROR F121 16 bit data ROL D n Rotate the n bits in data of D to the left 5 P121 left rotate PROL F122 16 bit data RCR D n Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D 5 P122 right rotate PRCR plus the carry flag R9009 data to the right with carry flag
16. Slotted screwdriver FPO Installation 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 4 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of FPO slim type mounting plate AFP0803 to mounting panel For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FPO slim type mounting plate see section 13 4 FPO slim type mounting plate o 49134 I e d q q 1 3 Screw i5 d amp 6 0 mm 0 236 in Procedure Mounting panel 1 Fitthe upper hook of the FPO unit onto the FPO slim type mounting plate 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the FPO unit into position FPO unit FPO slim type mounting plate When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the FPO slim type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example Two expansion units Dia 5 0 0 197 Dia 5 0 0 197 60 0 2 362 Dia 5 0 0 197 50 0 1 968 Dia 5 0 0 197 FPO slim type mounting plate unit mm in Installation FPO 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of FPO flat type mounting plate A
17. S LINK communication satus 1 Communication in progress ERR4 1 Disconnected wire or S LINK input output unit error ERR3 4 Problem with voltage level between D and G Not used ERR 1 Short circuit between D and G Notes ERR1 and ERR3 occur even if the power supply on the S LINK side is interrupted but are canceled when the power supply is turned on again ERR4 is held To cancel it repair the disconnected wire in the S LINK syste or whatever iscausing the problem and then either turn the power to the FPO on again press the SET switch to reset it or turn the power supply on again on the S LINK unit side 14 19 Address uen Name Descriptions FPO T32 C14 C16 2 C32 SL1 When normal 15 876543210 DT9021 No of units connected 0 to128 0 to H80 Note When the SET switch is pressed the number of input output units connected to the S LINK System is set DT9021 If the same address has been specified for Availabl No of units connected multiple units the units are counted as a single to S LINK error qum e type unit This is invalid however if an ERR4 error is address SL1 in progress If ERR4 occurs 15 8768543210 DT9021 Multiple errors 0 Single 1 Multiple Error address 0 to 127 0 to H7F Initial address if there are multiple errors The current scan time is stored here Scan time Scan time current is calculated using
18. i Bleeder p T resistor Internal circuit i r Internal resistor of limit switch kQ R Bleeder resistor kQ The OFF voltage of the FPO input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select R so that FPO 24 2 4 the current will be greater than r The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R or ae 5 6 x l 2 4 _ Power supply voltage The wattage W of the resistor is W R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 7 11 Wiring FPO 7 5 Output Wiring 7 5 Output Wiring e Notes There is no fuse protection built into the output circuit Therefore in order to protect against overheating of the output circuitry caused by possible short circuits install an external fuse at each point However in cases such as short circuits the control unit itself may not be protected Be sure to select the thickness dia of the output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the output wiring is separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in Protect the outputs as described below 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads
19. 2 22 2 4 2 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM 2 22 243 GI6T OT6GT unum te Arcos EUER cR EN ex 2 23 244 CO16P GCTOGP s croient uet ine Rete RD ERE 2 24 2 4 5 C32T C32CT TS2CT 2 25 246 C32P C382CP T32CP 4 EE USERS URL hoe ea eo Satake 2 26 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type 2 27 Chapter 3 Expansion I O Units 3 4 Parts and Terminology 0c ete 3 3 3 1 1 Expansion O Unit s hot e RR Chae Farbe tace hc d 3 4 3 2 Specifications de t t got pe RUE 3 6 3 21 General Specifications 3 6 3 2 2 Input Specifications eseiecs aperte pee a2 See ei atdes aed 3 6 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points Rer P DU Eq 3 7 3 2 3 Output Specifications 3 8 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type 3 8 3 2 3 2 6 3 9 3 3 Internal Circuit 8 1 3 10 3 3 1 Relay Output Type E8RS E8RM E16RS E16RM 3 10 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type is cis asa oa Sana ies 3 11 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type E16T E32T 3 11 3 3 2
20. 2 4 2 1 1 1 Status 6 2 6 2 1 1 2 Mode Switch ae Rat isle Seo eae anita RE 2 6 2 1 1 3 Tool Pato thy Seu ape ed 2 6 2 2 Specifications Bos ig ERN E 2 7 2 2 1 General Specifications 0 cee eee 2 7 2 2 1 1 2 7 2 2 1 2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit 2 8 2 2 2 Performance 6 6 2 10 223 Input Specifications geet 2 14 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON PONS 420 totes 2 15 2 24 Output Specifications 2 2c ee ee 2 16 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type 2 16 2 2 4 2 Transistor 6 2 17 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram x ov ews ese ewes oe eee HGS Sad TEER WR Ie 2 18 2 3 14 Relay Output Type C10RS C10CRS C1 4 5 14 14 18 2 3 2 6 19 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT 2 19 Table of Contents FPO 2 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CP 2 21 2 0 PIN Layouts eros Rte ties SED Prater dera bo i beds 2 22 2 4 1 C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM
21. Fomv K300 DT 103 8000 pls F168SPD1 DT100 HO Pulse stop R903A R20 Ti R22 I pr H H Positioning completion pulse 1 s Ss TMX 1 K10 6000Hz 1000 Hz 0 Hz High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Absolute value positioning operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from YO If the current value at that point is larger than 22 000 the direction output Y2 goes on and if the value is smaller than 22 000 the direction output Y2 does not go on xi R903A R32 R30 HoF Positioning operations running R30 R30 R31 DF J Positioning operations start Control code H112 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 Initial speed 200 Hz H FO MV H112 DT 100 FO MV K200 DT 101 FO MV K4000 DT 102 Maximum speed 4000 Hz Acceleration decelera F1 DMV K22000 DT 104 tion time 250 ms Fomv K250 DT 108 FOMV KO DT 106 Target value 22000 CS ee Ff Ct F168 SPD1 DT 100 HO Pulse stop R903A R30 T2 R32 Hor H Positioning completion pulse 1 s R32 TMX 2 K10 side side 10 000 22 000 30 000 4000 Hz Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 200 Hz 0 Hz 250 ms 250 ms FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Home return operation minus directi
22. Name Availability FPO A n P X 6 FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 FP3 N n T FP2SH 10SH FP Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF lt gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF gt Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF lt N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare
23. ON 1 ms or less YO and Y1 only 50 us or less ON OFF 1 ms or less YO and Y1 only 50 us or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED For NPN open collector type able to be used with different voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for driving the internal circuit External power supply for driving internal circuit 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated load voltage 5 V to 24 V DC Internal 7 j e o Load circuit w Ground for load voltage and ee for external power supply for 9 9 C r driving internal circuit 2 17 Optional Memory FPO 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 1 Relay Output Type C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM FPO C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Input sid 5 6 kQ eei 9 an i NER S P zs Note 1 circuit UO Eg 5 6 Xn 6 8 4 I Internal Ad Note circuit EFC 1 E com e e io 24 V DC Note 2 j Output side Yo Internal 8 circuit e Yn Load e Internal E T circuit COM Power e A supply 1 The resistor in the control unit
24. amp 3 3 E icc cao c72 C c2 amp amp amp F125 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P125 F126 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P126 F127 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P127 F128 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P128 Bit manipulation instructions F130 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P130 F131 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P131 F132 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P132 F133 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P133 F135 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P135 F136 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P136 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 85 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turn on the specified output and R900D after 0 01 5 timer 16 bit S x set value Special instructions F138 Hours min HMSS S D Converts the hour minute and second data of 5 P138 utes and sec PHMSS 511 S to seconds data and the converted data is onds to stored in D 1 D seconds data F139 Seconds to SHMS S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hour 5 P139 hours PSHMS minute and second data and the converted data is minutes and stored in D 1 D seconds data F140 Carry flag STC Turns on the carry flag R9009 1 P140 R90
25. n bits F109 Left shift of BITL D1 D2 n Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to 7 P109 multiple bits PBITL the left n bits F110 Right shift of WSHR D1 D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 5 P110 one word PWSHR to the right 16 bit F111 Left shift of WSHL D1 D2 Shifts the one word of the areas by D1 and D2 5 P111 one word PWSHL to the left 16 bit F112 Right shift of WBSR D1 D2 Shifts the one digit of the areas by D1 and D2 to 5 P112 one hexade PWBSR the right cimal digit 4 bit 14 80 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g CM c24 cse cjg C20 lt 4 Eo 9 E E t amp c16 C40 C72 c32 amp t amp amp F99 NA A A N A NA NIA NIA NA NA A A A A P99 F100 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P100 F101 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P101 F102 NA A A N A NIA NIA NIA NIA NA NA A A A P102 F103 NA A A N A NA N A NIA NA NIA NA A A A P103 F105 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P105 F106 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P106 F108 NA A A N A NIA NIA NIA NIA NIA NA A A P108 F109 NA A A N A NIA NIA NIA NIA NA A A P109 F110 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P110 F111 A A A Kon A A A A A A A A P111 F112 A A A A A A A A A A A A P112
26. Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the RS232C port terminal construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise Wire i CORRECT INCORRECT Wire Chapter 8 Precautions During Programming 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Use of Duplicated 8 3 8 1 1 Duplicated Output 8 3 8 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT SET or RST Instruction 8 4 Handling BCD Data 8 5 O21 BOD DAG ie Ga 8 5 8 222 Handling BCD Data in the PLC 8 5 Handling Index 8 7 8 3 1 Index Registers 8 7 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers 8 7 8 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register 8 8 ODBFallOP ENOS 3 sat ice ei ERROR DU 8 10 8 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors 8 10 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation EXPO OCGUIS duo ed Anna piede 8 10 8 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors
27. In programming tool software enter the time a number divisible by 2 5 In FP Programmer II enter the set value equal to the time divided by 2 5 Input setting 400 High speed counter mode settings to X2 Setting by progra mming tool software Do not set as high speed counter Do not set as high speed counter 2 phase input X0 X1 2 phase input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Incremental input XO Incremental input X0 Reset input X2 CHO Decremental input XO Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 Individual input X1 Individual input XO X1 Reset input X2 Direction decision X0 X1 Direction decision X0 X1 Reset input X2 Do not set X1 as high speed counter Do not set X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 CH1 Note1 If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH1 is invalid Note2 If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 14 8 FPO Item Add ress Name Default value Descriptions Input settin
28. n1 and n2 5 ple steps Step end STPE End of step ladder area 1 Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 38 Availability FP M Name 2 c ri x C14 C24 c56 oqe C20 2 e t amp amp c16 cao C72 c2 amp amp amp amp Loop A A A A A A A A A A A A A Label Break N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A End A A A A A A A A A A A A A Conditional A A A A A A A A A A A A A end Eject N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A Step ladder instructions Start step A A A A A A A A A A A A A Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A NSTL Next step A A A A A A A A A A A A A NSTP Clear step A A A A A A A A A A A A A Clear multi N A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A ple steps Step end A A A A A A A A A A A A A e A Available N A Not available 14 39 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Subroutine instructions Subroutine CALL Executes the specified subroutine When returning to the 2 3 call caL main program outputs in the subroutine program are Notet maintained Output off FCAL Executes the specified subroutine When returning to the 4 5 type subrou FcaLa main program all outputs in the subroutine
29. using the programming software the FPO continues to operate In this case even if the FPO continues to operate this is regarded as an error 11 4 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 gt Check the error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR In the ONLINE mode select Monitor from the menu bar of FPWIN GR And then select Status Display At the PLC Error Flag field self diagnostic error code is displayed Using FP programmer II Press the keys on the FP programmer II as shown on the right When self diagnostic error occurs the OP 110 screen shown on the right is displayed FUNCTION ERR E45 Error code is 1 to 9 lt Condition gt There is a syntax error in the program lt Procedure 1 gt Change to PROG mode and clear the error lt Procedure 2 gt Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method next page 11 5 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting Error code is 20 or higher lt Condition gt A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred lt Procedure 1 gt Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWI
30. 14 34 Availability FP1 FP M x Name 7 o x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp amp amp amp c16 cao C72 c2 amp amp amp amp Basic function instructions On delay A A Partly A N A N A N A N A N A N A A Partly Partly timer TML N A N A N A Note1 Note1 Note1 On delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly timer TMR N A N A N A Note1 Note1 Note1 On delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly timer TMX N A N A N A Note1 Note1 Note1 On delay A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly timer TMY N A N A N A Note1 Note1 Note1 Auxiliary A A A A N A N A A N A A A A A A timer 16 bit Auxiliary A A A A N A N A N A N A A N A A A A timer 32 bit Time N A N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A NA N A N A constant N A processing re Counter A A Partly A A A A A A A A Partly Partly N A N A N A Note1 Note1 Note1 UP DOWN A A A A A A A A A A A A A counter e A Available N A Not available Note1 With FP2SH FP10SH FP X Ver2 0 or later an arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of the counter instruction Note2 This instruction is available only for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 14 35 Name Boolean Symbol Descripti
31. 14 49 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 32 bit data STD Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 compare D 51 52 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 Start EE STD lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 D S1 2 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 92 STD gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 H D gt 51 52 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 952 STD gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 D gt S1 S2 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 952 or E S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 STD Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 H DC 51 52 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 952 STD lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 D 51 52 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or Ic 8141 1 S2 1 2 14 50 Availability Name FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 gt FPO gt gt FP X 32 bit data compare Start STD gt FP e N A A A N A A gt FP3 gt FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH 32 bit data A A A compare Start STD lt gt N A N A 32 bit
32. 17 P348 point type PFBAND D 5311 S3 1 1 S1 gt D 1 D data dead When 5211 S2 lt S3 1 S3 band control S341 S3 S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D When S141 S1 or S3 1 S3 or S2 1 S2 0 02 D 1 D F349 Floating FZONE 1 82 S8 When S341 S3 0 0 17 P349 point type D 5311 S3 S1 1 S 1 gt D 1 D data zone When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 02 D 1 D control When 5311 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 52 D 1 D F350 Floating FMAX 1 S2 D Searches the maximum value in the real number 8 P350 point type PFMAX data table between the area selected with S1 and data maxi S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address mum value relative to S1 is stored in D 2 14 116 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 Name B o 2 o we e 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N t t amp 2 amp c16 C40 C72 02 t amp titu F338 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P338 Floating point type real number data processing instructions F345 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P345 F346 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P346 F347 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P347 F348 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P348 F349 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P349 F350 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A A A A P350
33. For details please refer to the catalog or to the CC Link Unit manual FPO Link This is a link unit designed to make the FPO function as a station to MEWNET F AFP0732 Unit remote I O system C NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for AFP15402 adapter S2 connecting to a host computer via C NET It comes with a 30 cm FPO tool port type cable A power supply is not required for FPO side C NET This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of the Computer link function for 100 to 240 V DC AFP8536 adapter connecting to a network connected PLC via C NET from a host computer RS485 for com puter side FP Connected with FP series PLCs it conducts Ethernet communication sends e mail and displays the AFP0610 Web Server PLC data on HTML pages Unit Product REGGE Specifications FPO CC Link Slave Unit 24V DC AFP8532 1 1 5 Power Supply Unit X Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC FPO PSA4 AFPO634 Overview FPO 1 4 Components 1 1 6 Options and Additional Parts Data clear type AFP8670 Data hold type AFP8671 Relay output type AFP0806 Necessary when wiring terminals block Phoenix FP Memory loader Terminal screwdriver Molex connector Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors MOLEX 57189 5000 AFP0805 pressure contact tool Multi wire connector Necessary when wiring t
34. Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FPO FP e FP X FP1 FP M FP2 FP10SH FP2SH FP3 E41 Intelligent unit error Selec table An abnormality in an intelligent unit FPX FP X Check the contetns of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using System register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using System register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error in the status display function E42 I O unit verify error Selec table I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time fo power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP
35. Seed Perd 7 3 7 1 2 Emergency Stop Circuit 2 sc20 ecsaven tes geet EIS estes oes 7 3 7 1 3 Start Up Sequence 7 3 7 1 4 Momentary Power Failures 7 4 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections 7 4 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit 7 5 Grounding 1 So deep Ee Mono E EO 7 7 IUE Wiring aon ort iet ir oerte peu teed dese eae Peewee deat 7 9 1 4 1 S8nsSOIS Ga Ee PAP 7 9 7 4 2 LED Equipped Reed Switch 7 10 7 49 7 10 7 44 LED Equipped Limit Switch 0 00 eee ee 7 11 O tp t Wiring paster ide ia E ns 7 12 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive 845 7 12 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads 7 13 Wiring the Terminal 6 7 14 Wiring the MOLEX Connector 6 7 16 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 7 18 7 8 4 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring 7 19 Wiring the RS232C POI vues e Ee DUR IDEE ex xe Re eres 7 20 Chapter 8 Precautions During Programming 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Use of Dupl
36. Start STF lt gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare Start STF gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare Start STF gt Floating point type real number data compare Start STF lt N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare Start STF lt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 e A Available N A Not available Note1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later FPX 32k and FP2 FP2SH V2 0 or later 14 57 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Floating point type
37. voltage supply The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 6 E32P 3 4 Pin Layouts 32P X20 X21 X28 X29 0 7 X8 F Oo ONT din Hes sal HR o o 4 oo 5 olll S COM AU COM FL PROG w7 vF Output Y20 Y21 o o Y28 Y29 Leu 2 3 Se Load Load Load Load ao em Load Load Load Load e nollaa a 90 Load Load Load Load NOS Load Load Load Load Hs HE 1 C 0 1 The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well The two terminals of output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well The two terminals of the output terminals are internally connected however they should be externally conne
38. 0 08 to 1 25 mm Mtem Specification Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Transmission 3m 9 84 ft distance Terminal block Made by Phoenix Contact Co 3 pin Product number MKDS 1 3 3 5 Communication half duplex Settings when shipped from the factory These are changed using system registers 412 to 414 The settings in effect when the unit is shipped from the factory are noted below RS232C port is not used Character bit 8 bits Parity check odd Stop bit 1 bit Header without STX code Terminator CR Baud rate 9600 bps Use a shielded wire of the above wiring We recommend grounding the shield section Also if using a pole terminal see section 7 6 FPO Wiring 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port When tightening the RS232C port use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product no 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less Procedure Remove a portion of the wire s insulation D 7 mm 0 276 in Suitable wire Insert wire into the RS232C port until it contacts the back of the RS232C port RS232C port Suitable wire Tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Clockwise Wiring FPO 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port 557 Notes When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them
39. 05 9 9 932 Types of Input Modes 9 9 9 3 9 ei ede Deut e tete thes 9 11 9 3 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function 9 12 9 3 5 Sample Program e oa ee eer hi A os ERES xe 9 14 9 4 Pulse Output Function rie E nac ERA denen ARM Ie RR Rs 9 18 9 41 Outline of Pulse Output Function 9 18 942 Control Mode 2111 1 veo tere a rb ee Ra ue 9 19 9 4 3 I O Allocation and Wiring 9 20 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pulse Output Function 9 22 9 45 Sample Program for Positioning Control 9 25 9 5 PWM Output Function x oii ce x gn CORRER IER AM RR RR Rag 9 33 9 5 1 Outline of PWM Output Function 9 33 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function 9 33 Chapter 10 General use Serial Communications 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 3 Table of Contents FPO 10 1 1 General use Serial Communications esses 10 3 10 1 2 Data Transmission eee RII 10 3 10 1 3 Data Reception die een ERI RR RE at ER 10 4 10 2 System Register Settings 0 cece eee eee eee 10 5 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 8 10 3 1 If None is S
40. 34 Program example 2 Program in which the example 2 is rewritten FN TMX5 _K30 x1 TMX 5 K 30 YO mH gt x2 m Program example 3 Program in which the example 3 is rewritten PSHS X0 x1 YO X0 YO Grr e aH Yi uns gt H H Hor xa k POPS When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction 8 18 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How Operation of Rewrite During RUN The FPO allows program rewriting even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several msec to several hundreds of msec Operation During Rewrite External output Y is held External output X is ignored The timer T stops the clock Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right shift registers F119 LRSR are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped P
41. Ambient temperature C F FPO E16T E16P E8X at 26 4 V DC Number of g input points per common which are simultaneous 4 ON at 24 V DC 34 43 58 93 2 109 4 131 Ambient temperature C F FPO ES2T E32P E16X Number of 16 input points per common which are simultaneous 8 ON at 26 4 V DC at 24 V DC 26 34 55 78 8 93 2 181 Ambient temperature C F at 26 4 V DC Expansion I O Units FPO 3 2 Specifications 3 2 3 Output Specifications 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type FPO relay output types E8RS E8RM E16RS and E16RM Wem Deswip on S Output type Normally open 1 Form A relay output Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC 2A 30 V DC 4 5 A maximum per common at Resistance load Output points E8RS per common E8RM 4 points common E16RS E16RM Response time OFF lt ON 8 points common approx 10 ms ON lt gt OFF approx 8 ms Mechanical life time 20 000 000 operations or more Electrical life time 100 000 operations or more Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED FPO Expansion I O Units 3 2 Specifications 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type FPO transistor output types E16T E16P E32T E32P E8YT EBYP E16YT E16YP tem Description S Insulation method optical coupler Output type open collector Rated load voltage NPN open coll
42. N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later Note3 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPsigma Ver 3 10 or later 14 105 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps BCD type real number operation instructions F300 BCD type BSIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 6 P300 sine PBSIN operation F301 BCD type BCOS S D COS S141 1 5 D 1 D 6 P301 cosine PBCOS operation F302 BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 1 5 D 1 D 6 P302 tangent PBTAN operation F303 BCD type BASIN S D SIN 8151 1 gt D 1 D 6 P303 arcsine PBASIN operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS S141 S1 5 D 1 D 6 P304 arccosine PBACOS operation F305 BCD type BATAN S D TAN S141 S1 gt D 1 D 6 P305 arctangent PBATAN operation 14 106 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 Name 3 I 7 o we Xs 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N o t amp 2 amp c16 C40 C72 02 amp amp titu BCD type real number operation instructions F300 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A NA N A N A A A A P300 F301 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A A A A P301 F302 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A A A A P302 F303 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A
43. S 5 P80 data gt PBCD to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D 4 digit BCD Example K100 H100 data F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 5 P81 data gt 16 bit PBIN S to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D binary data Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data specified by 7 P82 data gt PDBCD S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data and stores it in 8 digit BCD D 1 D data F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data specified by 7 P83 data 32 bit PDBIN S 1 S to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in binary data D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV D Inverts each bit of data of D 3 P84 invert com PINV plement of 1 F85 16 bit data NEG D Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts 3 P85 complement PNEG the sign of 2 F86 32 bit data DNEG D Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 3 P86 complement PDNEG inverts the sign of 2 F87 16 bit data ABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 3 P87 absolute PABS 14 76 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 ri Ex Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g 614 c24 cse cjg C20 lt 4 Eo 9 E E t amp c16 C40 C72 c32 amp amp amp F78 A A A A NA A A A A A P78 F80 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P80 F81 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P81 F82 A A A A A A A A A
44. Total of DT9045 DT9047 4CH DT90044 DT90046 with DT90045 DT90047 max DT9048 DT9050 TONS DT9049 DT9051 DT90048 DT90050 DT90049 DT90051 DT9104 DT9106 DT9105 DT9107 DT90104 DT90106 DT90105 DT90107 DT9108 DT9110 DT9109 DT9111 DT90108 DT90110 DT90109 DT90111 Spec 2 phas DT9044 DT9046 Total of ify the e input DT9045 DT9047 2 CH Incre DT90044 DT90046 with de mental DT90045 DT90047 max sired decre 2 kHz output mental from input DT9104 DT9106 YOto Direc DT9105 DT9107 Y7 tional DT90104 DT90106 distinc DT90105 DT90107 tion Reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items Table of pulse output function speci Input output contact number being used Built in high speed Direc tional out put no DT9052 DT90052 lt bit2 gt counter channel fications Memory area used Con trol flag Elapsed value area DT9044 DT9045 DT90044 DT90045 DT9046 DT9047 DT90046 DT90047 Performance specifications for maximum output fre quency Max 10 kHz for 1 point output Max 5 kHz for Related instruc tions FO MV F1 DMV F168 SPD1 F169 PLS DT9052 DT90052 lt bit6
45. With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When switching DC inductive loads with FPO relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load FPO FPO terminal COM Output COM Surge absorber 3 Example of surge absorber R 50 Q C 0 47 uF Q terminal AC inductive load Varistor Ns AC inductive load w next page 7 12 FPO Wiring 7 5 When using a DC inductive load Diode Output terminal FPO E COM DC inductive load Diode Reverse voltage Vg 3 times the load voltage Average rectified forward current Ig Load current or more 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads Output Wiring When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Output AW Load terminal FPO Ed COM Output Inductor upu O00 Load terminal FPO COM 7 13 Wiring FPO 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type A screw down connection type terminal block socket for terminal of FPO control unit and analog I O unit is used The terminal block socket and suitable wires are given below Terminal block socket Terminal block
46. for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on Target value match off instruction F167 HDF F167 K30000 Y4 If the elapsed value DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off XD HDF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 If the elapsed value DT9108 and DT9109 DT90108 and DT90109 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off 9 13 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 5 Sample Program Wiring examples FPO Input terminal Operation start Encoder input Output terminal Operation Speed 0 0 X5 Encoder Inverter Operation Stop Number of pulse 9 14 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function Positioning operations with a single speed inverter When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops R903A R102 R100 Lor y F Positioning operations running R100 R100 R101 I pr a Positioning operations start R101 H F1DMV KO DT 9044 F167HC1R K5000 vo R101 YO p S Start signal to inverter R903A R100 R102 H DF H Completion pulse 0
47. month day hour minute second and DT90054 monitor day of the week data for the calendar timer is aue second stored The built in calendar timer will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The calendar timer can be set the Clock calendar monitor time set by writing a value using a programming DT90055 and setting tool software or a program that uses the FO MV day hour instruction Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Clock calendar monitor D99056 d and n DT90054 Minute data Second data year month HO0 to H59 BCD 00 to H59 BCD Day data Hour data D7T90093 H01 to H31 BCD HOO to H23 BCD Clock calendar monitor DT90056 Year data Month data DT90057 and setting HOO to H99 BCD 1 to H12 BCD day of the week Day of the week data em HOO to H06 BCD 14 24 Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Name Descriptions DT90058 Clock calendar time setting and 30 seconds correction The clock calendar is adjusted as follows When setting the clock calendar by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction Example Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5 day when the XO turns on 4 Inputs 0 min lt pr gt Fo
48. o o A uL uL uL uL C16 C40 C72 C32 uL uL uL Sequence basic instructions Start A A A A A A A A A A A A A Start Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A Out A A A A A A A A A A A A A Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A AND A A A A A A A A A A A A A AND Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A OR A A A A A A A A A A A A A OR Not A A A A A A A A A A A A A Leading N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A edge start N A Note2 Trailing edge N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A start N A Note2 e A Available N A Not available Note1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models Note2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPsigma Ver 3 10 or later 14 29 Steps Name Boolean Symbol Description Note Leading ANT XxRTGLRE Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only 2 edge AND for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge ANY X RTCL Pe Connects a Form A normally open contact serially only 2 AND for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading ORT ___ Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only 2 edge OR XY hi GURE for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge ORV __
49. problem Yes Fifth word of data able is set to HFF8000 lt or gt target value lt or H7FFFFF No Remedy problem Yes Please contact your dealer Home input is already used by interrupt or HSC Yes Remedy problem No Please contact your dealer Absolute mode setting is target value elapsed value Yes Remedy problem No Please contact your dealer FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 5 PWM Output Function 9 5 PWM Output Function 9 5 1 Outline of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the instruction F170 PWM the specified duty ratio and pulse width modulation is obtained Applicable to analog controls such as temperature control and light modulation Setting the system register When using the PWM output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 to Do not use high speed counter 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output Function PWM output instruction F170 X6 FO Mv H5 DT100 FO MV K500 DT101 F170 PWM DT100 KO While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 840 ms and duty ratio of 50 is output from YO X7 Fo Mv H6 DT100 Fo MV K300 DT101 F170 PWM DT100 K1 While X7 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 1 6 s and duty ratio of 30 is output from Y1 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 5 PWM Output Function C
50. section entitled Determining the Power Supply in the S LINK Design Manual For standard purposes a power supply exceeding 24V DC 1 6 A should be selected Supply of power to S LINK terminal block Supplied to S LINK input output devices N 2 Brown G Blue 2 M White n 0 Black From external power supply w next page 4 7 S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply S LINK terminal block MC1 5 6 ST 3 5 Made by Phoenix Contact Co Terminal name Color of connecting cable Description Main wire for S LINK I O devices External power supply input for S LINK Suitable wires twisted wire Size AWG 20 to 16 Normal cross section surface area 0 5 to 1 25mm Notes e The S LINK section is protected by a fuse but if too many input output devices are connected or if the current consumption is heavy enough to cause the fuse to blow we recommend providing a local power supply e A short circuit between D G or between D 24V triggers the protective circuit but there is no protection against short circuiting between G 24V or 0V 24V Be aware that a short circuit can cause a breakdown or malfunction FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies 4 4 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies When turning on the power supplies to the S LINK control unit follow the sequence outlined below Procedure 1 Turn on the p
51. tem will operate Also if a short circuit occurs at a location far away there may be times when ERR1 does not light Check the S LINK signal power line Error in level of signal being There is a possibility that the wiring length the transmitted configuration or the number of configuration devices connected to the system exceeds the rated limit Check the system configuration once again Address has been changed Check to see if the S LINK signal power line D or G line is broken or dis is broken or disconnected or if the address is connected incorrect Error in S LINK unit for dis In this case transmission signals are being played address note 2 output so the S LINK input output devices operate normally Notes 1 This ERROR indicator lights even if the external power supply to the S LINK has not been turned on but this does not indicate a breakdown in the S LINK control unit itself Check the external power supply to the S LINK 2 ERR4 is held so to cancel it one of the following is required turn the power supply to the FPO off and then on again press the system SET button and enter the settings again or turn the power supply on the S LINK side off and then on again 4 13 S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 8 X Judging Errors Address Displays 4 8 Judging Errors Address Displays The transmission line is monitored at all times and if an error occurs the address at which the
52. the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter i clockwise Wire a m 5 CORRECT INCORRECT Wire 7 15 Wiring FPO 7 7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type 7 7 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type The housings and contacts listed below come supplied with the FPO Use the wires given below Also use the required special tool for connecting the wires Housing Contact a Suitable wire Supplied connector Manufacturer tem Product number Molex Japan Co Ltd Housing 51067 0900 2 pieces Contact 50217 8100 20 pieces Suitable wires twisted wire Size AWG 24 to 18 Conductor cross sectional area 0 2 to 0 75 mm Insulation outside diameter dia 1 4 to dia 3 0 Special crimping tool Manufacturer Molex Japan Co Ltd Product number 57189 5000 Procedure 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 4 Wire e 3 to 3 5 mm 0 118 to 0 138 in w next page 7 16 FPO Wiring eS Note 7 7 Wirin
53. to stop operation set KO E47 MEW NET F attribute error Selec table In the unit on the slave station an abnormallty such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using System register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 E49 Expansion unit power supply sequence error Stops The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion unit at the same time or before the control unit is turend on A Available 14 131 Error Opara I Name tion Description and steps to take E Io code oux E 069 status Sle lela amp miele lye ur fale lope The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of conrol Backup en unit is not installed A onti gt Check the installation of the backu Note battery nues battery and then replace battery if A AVA A A AA errror necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard thi
54. 0 14 64 14 4 Table of Error codes 14 124 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 14 138 14 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 14 139 147 ASG GOdGS chy ee eee deere eave keane ee 14 140 NAEK pem l 1 Record of changes aanaeio R 1 xi Table of Contents FPO xii Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 9 1 4 Overview E 1 3 1 1 1 FPOControl Units 1 3 1 1 2 Expansion 5 1 4 1 1 3 1 5 L4 VENEUSE a 1 5 1 1 5 Power Supply Unit csse nes ees 1 5 1 1 6 Options and Additional Parts 1 6 Expansion Possibilities eee ees 1 7 Combination Possibilities lisse 1 8 1 8 1 Relay Output 6 5 1 8 1 3 2 Transistor Output Type Units 1 9 Programming ToolS v s pee altace ee ERROR ER xsi 1 10 Overview FPO FPO Overview 1 4 Components 1 1 Components 1 1 1 Product name FPO C10 Control Unit FPO Control Units Built in memory Program capacuty EEPROM 2 7k steps Specifications Number of points Input 6 Output 4 Power supply voltage 24V DC Sink Sourse common
55. 10 P289 16 bit data PZONE D When S3 0 02D When 9320 S3 825D F290 Zone control DZONE 81 92 S3 When S341 S3 0 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 16 P290 32 bit data PDZONE D D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D 14 104 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 Name 3 I 7 o we Xs 9 C14 C24 C56 20 2 e t amp s t amp C16 cao C72 c32 amp amp F277 NA A A Party N A N A N A N A NA NA A A A P277 bs F278 NA A A Party N A N A N A N A NA NA A A A P278 Med F282 NA A A Partly N A N A NIA N A NA NA A A A P282 AMA F283 NA A A N A N A N A N A N A NIA NA A A A P283 F284 N A N A Party N A NIA NIA N A NIA NIA NIA N A N A N A P284 A Integer type non linear function instructions F285 NA A A Party N A N A N A NIA NA NA A A A P285 NS F286 NA A A Party N A N A N A NIA NA NA A A A P286 Nds F287 NA A A Party N A N A N A NIA NA NA A A A P287 D F288 NA A A Party N A N A NA NIA N A NA A A A P288 NA F289 NA A A Party N A N A N A NIA NA NA A A A P289 NA F290 N A A A Party N A N A N A NIA NA NA A A A P290 WA e A Available
56. 16 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 S 32 n 32 Input 32 Output 32 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 32 16 16 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 g 16 32 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 16 Output 16 nput 8 Output 8 4 16 16 16 x 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 _ 32 32 4 16 Input 40 Output 40 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 nput 8 Output 8 E 32 16 n 16 i 16 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 16 32 32 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 16 32 16 A 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 x 32 32 4 32 Input 48 Output 48 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 _ 32 32 16 x 16 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 x 16 amp 32 32 x 16 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 _ 32 32 32 x 16 Input 56 Output 56 77 Input 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 _ 16 2 32 4 32 4 32 Input 8 Output 8 nput 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 32 32 32 4 32 Input 64 Output 64 77 I
57. 2 4 2 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Input C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Output Load Load e 0 5 Load e Load e Power supply Load Power supply Load Power supply Note Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Optional Memory 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 3 C16T C16CT Input C16T C16CT o X1 L O O COM Output Y1 e Load e e Load 9 5 e Load 9 6 e e The two COM terminals of input terminal X0 7 are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Optional Memory FPO 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 4 C16P C16CP C16P C16CP Output
58. 2 PNP Open Collector Type E16P E32P 3 13 3 8 8 Expansion Input Units E8X E16X 3 14 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 00 3 15 3 3 4 1 NPN Open Collector Type E8YT E16YT 3 15 3 3 4 2 PNP Open Collector Type E8YP E16YP 3 17 3 4 PIN ESOUIS 2 oid sedet cae d es eR Wee Dees Me 3 18 3 4 1 3 18 3 4 2 ETORS ETORM oes ert ee De eee dtes Y 3 19 94 3 ates olen has ale oS asl Oa 3 20 E E oae e B e oO Rer QU 3 21 345r cumbre eie BENE ets 3 22 SAGs GE BAR e RU e b e ere rt od etd 3 23 934 dESXI IMPO Rete t e E 3 24 34 8 ET6X rece a ee Sh tar pe roba pes c e t d cons ka f 3 25 949 E8YT ri eet ations EDU UR aie aaa ees bees 3 26 3410 EBV PS ec auTou WA Se IE PAS 3 26 vi FPO Table of Contents SANT ETEY cA tek eua olio Oe te es td A tla 3 27 Op 3 28 Chapter 4 S LINK Control Unit 41 Names and Functions ec te Cr ted ay rec A Re sd 4 3 42 Specifications oso tails a te EP NEN S EN E ee 4 5 4 2 1 General Specifications 00 cee 4 5 4 2 2 S LINK Controller Specifications cece eee 4 6 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply eee eee eee eee eee 4 7 4 3 1 X Wiring to Power Supply
59. 2 System Register Settings Start codes STX and terminal codes EXT When data is transmitted the specified code is added automatically to the data being sent When receiving data if Yes has been specified for the start code parameter data following the start code is stored in the reception buffer Also at the point at which the terminal code is received the reception completed flag R9038 goes on The start and terminal codes themselves are not stored in the reception buffer however For details see section 10 3 2 eS Note If no terminal codes are specified for either transmission or reception the reception completed flag will not go on In this case watch the number of bytes received to determine whether the reception has been completed rd amp Example Changing the terminal code to CR and LF Datalengt h Parit y check St opbit Terminal code ya Start code el 1 ChangeHs default value t oH13 10 6 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 2 System Register Settings Setting the Baud Rate System Register 414 The baud rate transmission speed for general use serial communication is set to 9600 bps H1 in the default settings To change this setting to match the external device connected to the RS232C port select one of the values listed below RS232C port Tool port H1 19200 bps H1 9600 bps H2 4800 bps If anything other than HO or H3 2400 bps H1
60. 3 5 5 55 5 5 5 5 1 4 1 5 5 o a n ag o Ag n Ll BO Bc BO BC H HH HH We oy WH We ol HH Wes oo D oo D eo E O E O Tp HEHA bat Ire N N Z o ad o A B C D dimensions Unit mm in Control unit type A A B A B C A B C D Control unit 1 expansion 2 expansion 3 expansion only unit units units connected connected connected C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM C16T C16CT C16P C16CP 25 0 984 50 1 969 75 2 953 100 3 937 C32T C32CT C32P C32CP 30 1 181 55 2 165 80 3 150 105 4 134 13 6 FPO Dimensions 13 4 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 13 4 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate One plate 4 0 157 25 0 0 984 10 0 0 394 EE 6 0 0 236 9 D o 9 dir 10 0 0 394 dir 5 0 0 197 i AFP0803 2 5 0 098 unit mm in 3 5 0 138 unit mm in Four plates in series Mounting hole dimensions 75 0 2 953 1 25 0 25 0 25 0 0 984 0 984 0 984 9 100 3 937 90 0 3 543 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 f e Q Q dir 5 0 2 362 After joining all of the F
61. 3 StartUp Sequence 7 3 7 1 4 Momentary Power Failures 7 4 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output SOCHONS 222425 cepta XR bwin e ERE eee 7 4 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit 7 5 GOUNGING uris ot eed por cof ume t 7 7 Input WING 5 etes ouk ert eo de ez 7 9 QE SORS aout dott Sortable Eni ee 7 9 7 42 LED Equipped Reed Switch 7 10 7 43 Two Wire Type Sensor 7 10 7 4 4 LED Equipped Limit Switch 7 11 Output Wiring oe Leet 7 12 7 5 1 Protective Circuit for Inductive Loads 7 12 7 5 2 Precautions for Using Capacitive Loads 7 13 Wiring the Terminal 6 7 14 Wiring the MOLEX Connector Type 7 16 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 7 18 7 8 1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring 7 19 Wiring the RS232C eee ee 7 20 Wiring FPO FPO Wiring 7 1 Safety Instructions 7 1 Safety Instructions In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power ON timing differences between the FPO control unit and or motorized devices e An operation time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the FPO unit power supply circuit or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety circuits or other safe
62. 8 11 8 44 Points to Check in Program 8 12 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 18 8 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method sss ax x EA 8 13 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time 8 14 w next page Precautions During Programming FPO 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 5 8 Precautions When Using a Control INSWUCHON EE 8 16 Precautions for Programming 8 18 Rewrite Function During 8 19 8 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN 8 19 8 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible i s o ci tno capud supr RY ne ced 8 20 8 7Z3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN 2 5252 sc eb REL 8 21 8 74 Changing Modes in FP Programmer Il 8 22 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter D ring MEET 8 23 8 8 0 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer ll cea 8 23 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area 8 24 Processing During Forced Input and Output 8 27 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer 92 0 6 8 28 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 1 Use of Duplicated Output 8 1 Use of Duplicated Output 8 1 1 Duplicated Output Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a program If the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is consid
63. A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF lt gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF gt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF gt Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF lt N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF lt N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 e A Available N A Not availab
64. A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P146 F145 N A Partly A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P145 N A Note2 F146 N A Partly A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P146 N A Note2 F145 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P145 N A N A Note2 Note2 F146 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A P146 N A N A Note2 Note2 F147 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A F148 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P148 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FPX 32k 14 89 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F149 Message MSG S Displays the character constant of S in the 13 P149 display PMSG connected programming tool F150 Data read READ S1 S2 n Reads the data from the intelligent unit 9 P150 from intelli PREAD D gent unit F151 Data write WRT S1 S2 n Writes the data into the intelligent unit 9 P151 into intelli PWRT D gent unit F152 Data read RMRD S1 S2 n Reads the data from the intelligent unit at the 9 P152 from PRMRD D MEWNET F remote I O slave station MEWNET F slave station F153 Data write RMWT 1 52 n Writes the data into the intelligent unit at the 9 P
65. A P39 BCD arithmetic instructions F40 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P40 F41 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P41 F42 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P42 F43 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P43 F45 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P45 F46 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P46 F47 A A A A A A A N A A A A A A P47 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 69 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F48 8 digit DB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 11 P48 BCD data PDB subraction F50 4 digit B S1 S2 D S1 X S2 D 1 D 7 P50 BCD data PB multiplication F51 8 digit DB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 5 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 11 P51 BCD data PDB multiplication F52 4 digit B S1 S2 D S1 S2 quotient D 7 P52 BCD data PB remainder DT9015 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or division DT90015 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP10SH F53 8 digit DB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 5quotient D 1 D 11 P53 BCD data PDB remainder DT9016 DT9015 for FPO FP e FP1 division FP M FP3 or DT90016 DT90015 for FPO T32 FPZ FP2 FP2SH FP10SH F55 4 digit B 1 D D 1 D 3 P55 BCD data PB 1 increment F56 8 digit DB 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 P56 BCD data PDB 1 increment F57 4 digit B 1 D D 1 D 3 P57 BCD data PB 1 decrement F58 8 digit DB 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3
66. A A P152 F153 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P153 F154 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A N A N A P154 F155 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P155 N A N A Note6 Note5 F156 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P156 N A N A Note6 Note5 F157 Partly A A A N A A A A A A A A A P157 N A Note3 F158 Partly A A A N A A A A A A A A A P158 N A Note3 F159 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P159 N A N A Note4 Note4 F161 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P161 N A N A Note4 Note4 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later Note3 This instruction is available for T32 type Note5 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Note4 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later Note6 This instruction is available for Ver 3 10 or later 14 91 jus Name Boolean Operand Description Steps BIN arithmetic instruction F160 Double word DSQR S D S gt D 7 P160 32 bit data PDSQR square root Special instructions High speed counter instructions FO High speed MV S DT9052 Performs high spee
67. A A A A A A A A A A P35 F36 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P36 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 67 Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F37 16 bit data 1 D D 15 D 3 P37 decrement P 1 F38 32 bit data D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D 3 P38 decrement PD 1 F39 32 bit data D D 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 D 1 D 11 P39 multiplication PD D result in 32 bits BCD arithmetic instructions F40 4 digit Bt S D D S 5 D 5 P40 BCD data PB addition F41 8 digit DB S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 P41 BCD data PDB addition F42 4 digit B S1 S2 D S1 S2 D 7 P42 BCD data addition F43 8 digit DB 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 11 P43 BCD data PDB addition F45 4 digit B S D D S D 5 P45 BCD data PB subtraction F46 8 digit DB S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 P46 BCD data PDB subtraction F47 4 digit B S1 S2 D S1 S2 D 7 P47 BCD data PB subtraction 14 68 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 I Name 5 E 2 o Xe C14 C24 c56 C C20 m 9 2 E 2 amp c16 cao C72 c32 t ok F37 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P37 F38 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P38 F39 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A
68. A N A NA N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A setting PLC link N A A A N A NA N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A time setting MEWTOCOL N A A A N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A COM response control High speed N A A A N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A counter operation mode changing System N A A A N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A registers No 40 to No 47 changing Note1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps Note2 With FPsigma 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 14 43 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Data compare instructions 16 bit data ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 compare 5152 the comparative condition S1 S2 Start E ST lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 H gt 91 52 the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 ST gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 H gt 5152 the comparative condition S1 gt S2 ST gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 H gt S182 the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 ST lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 H S1 S2 the comparative con
69. C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CP FP0 C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CP Input side 5 6 kQ e E Le Internal L Note 1 i circuit J F i L i i 5 6 kQ 1 9 T Xn O 1 e o Internal 2 o XL Jt 24V DC A E nang he Te circuit Ad Note 2 COM j Output side TY I Internal TON 9 d Load circuit gt YO a 9 WW Internal C 9 9 an Load 9 circuit J I L T 24V DC Load voltage and 6 654 external power supply x Notes 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 kQ for XO through X5 and 1 kQ for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Optional Memory FPO 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 1 C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM Note Power supply Load Load Power supply
70. Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 5 81 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 OR gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 gt 81 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 OR gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 y 81 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 OR lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 8182 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 OR lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 ESET comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 82 14 48 Availability Name FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 gt FPO gt gt FP X 16 bit data compare OR OR gt FP e N A A A N A A gt FP3 gt FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH 16 bit data A A A compare OR OR lt gt N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare OR OR gt N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare OR OR gt 16 bit data A A A compare OR OR lt N A N A N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare OR OR lt N A N A e A Available N A Not available
71. DT9107 High speed counter target value area for ch2 The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset values can only be read and cannot be written DT90108 DT9108 DT90109 DT9109 High speed counter elapsed value area for ch3 The elapsed value 24 bit data of the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9108 and DT9109 DT90108 and DT90109 The value can be written by executing a DMV F1 instruction DT90110 DT9110 DT90111 DT9111 High speed counter target value area for ch3 The target value 24 bit data of the high speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset values can only be read and cannot be written 14 27 14 2 Table of Basic Instructions Steps Name Boolean Symbol Description Note Sequence basic instructions Star
72. FPO control unit turns OFF before the power supply for I O e If the power supply for I O is turned OFF before the power supply of FPO control unit the FPO control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Before turning ON the power When turning ON the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When carrying out construction check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Set the mode switch to PROG mode Manuals To Be Used FPO Manuals To Be Used The required manuals differ according to the units to be used See the table below A Available N A Not available Unit type User s manual Programming manual Manual No No ARCT1F389E No ARCT1F313E gt gt N A N A ARCT1F366E ARCT1F390E ARCT1F321E ARCT1F382E ARCT1F380E N A N A FPO Control unit FPO Expansion unit FPO Thermocouple unit FPO Analog I O unit FPO A D conversion unit FPO D A conversion unit FPO CC Link slave unit FPO I O link unit FPO Power supply unit A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A suffix 1 is added to the end of manual numbers when the manuals have been revised The final numbe
73. Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of IY Contents of IX Precautions During Programming FPO 8 3 Handling Index Registers 8 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly Reading in External Data A il Example Writing the contents of word external input relay WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RO H Fo wy KO IX 1 R1 HDF FO Mv WX3 IXDTO e o F35 1 IX When RO turns on is written to index register IX When the R1 turns on the contents of WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IXDTO Add 1 to IX In this case the contents of IX will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times Contents of Destination of R1 IX data register Inputting and Outputting Data Based on a Number Specified by an Input A il Example 1 Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch PLC Timer 2 oll zliel 4 Timer set value setting o timer time setting number E ae WX1 WxX0 L Digital switches FPO Precautions During Programming 8 3 Handling Index Registers RO HDF F81 BIN wd IX 1 09 F81 BIN Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set i
74. N A A A A P303 F304 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P304 F305 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A NA N A N A A A A P305 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 107 Num bes Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Floating point type real number operation instructions F309 Floating FMV S D S 1 S O D 1 D 8 P309 point type PFMV data move F310 Floating F 1 92 D S141 S1 S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D 14 P310 point type PF data addition F311 Floating F 1 S2 D 5111 S1 S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D 14 P311 point type PF data subtraction F312 Floating F 91 S2 D 8141 S1 x S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D 14 P312 point type PF data multiplication F313 Floating F 1 S2 D 8141 S1 S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D 14 P313 point type PF data division F314 Floating SIN S D SIN S 1 S O D 1 D 10 P314 point type PSIN data sine operation F315 Floating COS S D COS S 1 S O D 1 D 10 P315 point type PCOS data cosine operation F316 Floating TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D 10 P316 point type PTAN data tangent operation F317 Floating ASIN S D SIN S 1 S D 1 D 10 P317 point type PASIN data arcsine operation F318 Floating ACOS S D COS S41 S gt D 1 D 10 P318 point type PACOS data arccosine operatio
75. OR ORF N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 e A Available N A Not available Note1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later 32k and FP2 FP2SH V2 0 or later 14 61 14 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows e Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on e Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected ny Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data transfer instructions FO 16 bit data MV S D S 5 D 5 PO move PMV F1 32 bit data DMV S D 511 S gt D 1 D 7 P1 move PDMV F2 16 bit data MV S D S 5 D 5 P2 invert and PMV move F3 32 bit data DMV S D 511 gt D 1 D 7 P3 invert and PDMV move F4 Reading of GETS S D The head word No of the specified slot is read 5 P4 head word PGETS No of the specified slot F5 Bit data BTM S n D The specified one bit in S is transferred to the 7 P5 move PBTM specified one
76. Output 4 0 10 16 16 8 Input 26 Output 24 x nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 ee 14 16 16 8 Input 28 Output 26 m nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 4 Output 4 10 16 16 16 Input 30 Output 28 gt nput 6 Output 4 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 14 16 16 16 Input 32 Output 30 nput 8 Output 6 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 nput 8 Output 8 FPO Overview 1 3 Combination Possibilities 1 3 2 Transistor Output Type Units First Second Third Total number of ntrol boints ber o con 9 expansion expansion expansion unit unit unit 0 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 32 Input 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 16 16 Input 8 Output 8 Input 8 Output 8 32 4 16 Input 24 Output 24 77 Input 16 Output 16 Input 8 Output 8 E 16 32 Input 8 Output 8 Input 16 Output 16
77. P334 F335 A A A A NA NA NIA NA NA A A P335 F336 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P336 F337 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P337 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 115 Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F338 Floating DEG S D The angle data in radians real number data 8 P338 point type PDEG specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in data radian degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D degree Floating point type real number data processing instructions F345 Floating FCMP 1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on 10 P345 point type PFCMP S141 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on data compare S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on F346 Floating FWIN S1 S2 S3 141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 R900A on 14 P346 point type PFWIN S241 S2 or S1 1 S1 or S3 1 S3 data band R900B on compare 5111 1 lt S2 1 82 R900C on F347 Floating FLIMT 1 S2 S8 When S141 S1 S341 S3 51151 S1 17 P347 point type PFLIMT D D 1 D data upper When 8211 S2 lt S3 1 S3 52441 S2 and lower D 1 D limit control When 5111 S1 or 5811 S3 or S2 1 S2 53511 S3 5 D 1 D F348 Floating FBAND 1 82 S8 When 95141 S1 gt S3 1 S3
78. PDROL double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left F127 32 bit data DRCR D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the 5 P127 right rotate PDRCR double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to with carry the right together with carry flag R9009 data flag R9009 data F128 32 bit data DRCL D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the 5 P128 left rotate PDRCL double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to with carry the left together with carry flag R9009 data flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions F130 16 bit data bit BTS D n Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 5 P130 set PBTS 1 F131 16 bit data bit BTR D n Set the value of bit position n of the data of D to 5 P131 reset PBTR 0 F132 16 bit data BTI D n Invert the value of bit position n of the data of D 5 P132 invert PBTI F133 16 bit data bit BTT D n Test the value of bit position n of the data of D 5 P133 test PBTT and output the result to R900B F135 Number of on BCU S D Store the number of on bits in the data of S in D 5 P135 1 bits in PBCU 16 bit data F136 Number of on DBCU S D Store the number of on bits in the data of S 1 S 7 P136 1 bits in PDBCU in D 32 bit data 14 84 Availability zx Note1 FP M Note1 Name E E o we 9 C14 C24 C56 C20 e N o
79. PNP 0 1A EEPROM Input 16 24 V DC Transisi MIL connector FP0 C32CT P02543C FPO C32 bk steps Output 16 Sink Sourse otuput Control Unit common 01A with RS232C Transisi FP0 C32CP P02553C port otuput 0 1 A FPO T32 EEPROM Input 16 24V DC Transisi MIL connector FPO TS2CT PO2643C Control Unit 10k steps Output 16 Sink Sourse otuput with common 01A RS232C port and Clock Cal endar func tion Transister otuput PNP 0 1A FPO TS2CP P02653C FPO S LINK Control Unit with RS232C port EEPROM 5k steps Input 64 Output 64 S LINK section Terminal block FPO SL1 P02700 Overview FPO 1 4 Components 1 1 2 FPO Expansion Units Specifications Product Power Number of name 1 0 points supply Output Connection Part No Product No voltage type Input 8 24 V DC MIL connector FPO E8X AFP03003 Sink Sourse common Input 4 24V DC Relay output 2A Terminal block FPO E8RS AFP03023 Output 4 Sink Sourse FPO 8 common Molex connector FPO E8RM AFP03013 Expansion Unit Input 8 E Relay output 2A Terminal block FPO E8YRS AFP03020 Output 8 Transister otuput MIL connector FPO E8YT AFP03040 NPN 0 1 A Transister otuput AFP03050 PNP 0 1 A Input 16 24 V DC MIL connector FPO E16X AFP03003 Sink Sourse common Input 8 24V DC Relay output 2A Terminal block FPO E16RS AFP03323 Output 8 Sink Sours
80. Power supply of S LINK control unit turned on S LINK section 2 6 seconds data Se refreshed FPO section I O data area lt 0 07 seconds refreshed When the power supply to the S LINK control unit is turned on it takes approximately 2 6 seconds for the S LINK I O data to be verified by the FPO section Be particularly careful with regard to the FPO sequence program if using the S LINK input at the b contact relay when the power supply is turned on 4 10 FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 1 Recognizing the Address Before the S LINK system is being operated for the first time turn on the power supply and then press the system SET button When the system SET button is pressed the number of connected devices recognized by S LINK control unit blinks on the error address display in hexadecimal RIN ERROR SO dg ADDRESS oO dr ee a H H an ERROR ADDRESS display yes oo Displaying in hexadecimal lan oO is SET 9 System SET button If the actual number of connected devices differs from the number displayed since an unrecognized S LINK device exists check for address overlapping improper connection etc Subsequently an error check is carried out based on this status When an address is recognized that status is stored in the EEPROM so it is
81. R9009 data F123 16 bit data RCL D n Rotate the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D 5 P123 left rotate PRCL plus the carry flag R9009 data to the left with carry flag R9009 data 14 82 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 b I Name 5 E 2 o WE 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp t amp c16 C40 C72 c2 amp amp amp F113 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P113 FIFO instructions F115 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P115 F116 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P116 F117 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P117 Basic function instructions F118 A A A A A A A A A A A A A F119 A A A A A A A A A A A A A Data rotate instructions F120 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P120 F121 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P121 F122 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P122 F123 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P123 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 83 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F125 32 bit data DROR D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the 5 P125 right rotate PDROR double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right F126 32 bit data DROL D n Rotate the number of bits specified by n of the 5 P126 left rotate
82. S 15 P95 ASCII code PASC are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table SRC S1 S2 S3 The data of S1 is searched for in the areas in the 7 P96 data search PSRC range S2 to S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 and DT90037 and DT90038 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP10SH F97 32 bit table DSRC 1 S2 S3 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched for in the 32 bit 11 P97 data search PDSRC data designated by S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 Data shift instructions F98 Data table CMPR D1 D2 D3 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of the data 7 P98 shift out and PCMPR between D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed compress and shifted in order toward D2 14 78 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 b I Name 5 E 2 o WE x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp t amp C16 C40 C72 c2 amp amp amp F88 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P88 F89 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P89 F90 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P90 F91 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P91 F92 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P92 F93 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P93 F94 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P94 F95 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P95 F96 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P96 F97 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P97 Data shift instructions F98 N A A A N A
83. The point of grounding should be as close to the FPO control unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device e Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line 24 VDC and GND terminal of the FPO power supply connector is connected to the frame ground F G through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line 24 VDC and GND and earth the varistor may be shorted Power supply connector of FPO control unit 24V DCO re supply lines GND 9 Varistor Varistor 39 V DC F G Q 9 ee Wiring FPO 7 9 Grounding When the plus side is grounded do not ground the functional earth terminal Do not ground the FPO functional earth terminal if the plus terminal of the power supply is grounded Depending on the PC some types have the SG terminal of the RS232C port connected to the outside structure of the connector Also the outside structure of the FPO tool port is connected to the functional earth terminal For this reason connecting a PC will connect the FPO GND terminal to the functional earth terminal In particular because a voltage of 24 V will be applied to the GND terminal when the plus terminal is grounded a potentially damaging
84. With expansion board s 0 3ms and 1 x number of expansion boards ms Operation Relay Internal relay R 1 008 points RO to R62F 1 008 1 008 memory points RO points RO points to R62F to R62F Note 1 Special internal 64 points R9000 to R903F relay R Timer Counter 144 points initial setting is 100 timer points TO to T99 44 counter points T C C100 to C143 Note 2 Timer range 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s selected by instruction Memory Data register 1 660 words DTO to DT1659 6 144 16 384 6 144 area DT words words words DTO to DTO to DTO to DT6143 DT16383 DT6143 Note 1 Special data 112 words DT9000 to DT9111 112 words 112 words register DT DT90000 DT9000 to to DT90111 DT9111 Index register 2 words IX IY Differential points DF DF Unlimited of points Master control relay points MCR 32 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels 2 10 FPO Optional Memory 2 2 Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM C16CP Number of step ladders 128 stages 704 stages 128 stages Note 1 Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 sub 16 sub routines routines Number of interrupt programs 7 programs external 6 points internal 1 point 1 program internal 1 point Self diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer pro
85. arc 14 96 Availability A Available N A Not available Note1 FP M Note1 I Name 3 o o we 9 C14 C24 C56 C20 e N o A ag jag n C16 n n n A u 2 L2 u C16 C40 C72 C32 u u u u High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FO N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F1 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F166 A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F167 A A A N A NA NA N A N A N A N A NA N A N A F171 N A A A N A NA N A N A NA N A NA NA N A N A F172 N A A A N A N A N A N A NA N A NA NA N A N A F173 N A A A N A NA N A N A NA N A N A NA N A N A F174 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F175 N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F176 N A A N A N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Note3 Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels Note3 This instruction is available for C32T2 C28T2 C32T2H and C28T2H 14 97 Num Ber Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Screen display instructi
86. bit in D The bit is specified by n F6 Hexadecimal DGT S n d The specified one digit in S is transferred to the 7 P6 digit 4 bit PDGT specified one digit in D The digit is specified by data move n F7 Two 16 bit MV2 S1 S2 D 1 D 7 P7 data move PMV2 2 gt D 1 F8 Two 32 bit DMV2 S1 S2 D 5111 S1 gt D 1 D 11 P8 data move PDMV2 5211 S2 5 D 3 D 2 F10 Block move BKMV 1 S2 D The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to 7 P10 PBKMV the area starting at D 14 62 Availability E Note1 FP M Note1 Name 5 T 2 o we 9 c14 C24 C56 C20 ei 9 5 A ag ag a C16 o o o A uL we we uL C16 C40 C72 C32 uL uL uL uL Data transfer instructions FO A A A A A A A A A A A A A PO F1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P1 F2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P2 F3 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P3 F4 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P4 N A N A Note2 Note2 F5 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P5 F6 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P6 F7 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P7 F8 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P8 F10 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P10 A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later 14 63
87. data Second data Ass HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Y ilab Day data Hour data Ms 1 to H31 00 to H23 v Year data Month data to H99 H01 to H12 ilab Availab Day of week data H00 to H06 i Availab Clock Calendar timer setting There are three ways to set the clock calendar timer as follows When using the Windows version of FPWIN 1 While online open the setting menu by selecting Tool and then Set PLC Date and Time 2 Enter the Date and Time and press OK Set PLC Date and Time Untitle2 PL Home Date yy mm dd o oo Cancel Time hh mm ss Help po foo fo When using DOS version software 1 While online select Monitor and then Data monitor 2 Select Save data f6 and then save data registers DT90054 to DT90057 3 Select Write ON f4 and Data write f7 in that order and then write a value Precautions During Programming FPO 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only Setting and changing using a program 1 Transfer the value to be written into special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 that are allocated in clock calendar timer setting area 2 Write H8000 to DT90058 Note Execute the transfer using P type derivative execution instruction or transfer in the order of H8000 to H0000 A il Example With XO on adjust to the 5th day 12 00 00 L lt pF g
88. gramming tools Note 11 Memory Internal re areas lays 128 which can points be speci Date fied Timers Counters 32 words Internal re Note lays Data 14 registers registers Areas which are held if the power supply fails are fixed and are retained by the EEROM Number of points words of the fixed hold areas in the various memories Counters 16 points Internal re lays 128 points Date registers 32 words Note 14 Backup by the F12 F13 instruction me Notes Available for all data registers 1 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 2 The proportion of timer points to counter points can be changed using a system register 5 2 12 FPO Optional Memory 55 Notes 2 2 Specifications 3 Precision of calender timer At 0 C 32 F less than 139 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 72 seconds error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 169 seconds error per month This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation coefficient value based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of 5V and the battery backup voltage of 3V Also F157 and F158 time date addition and subtraction instructions cannot be used 4 When using the RS232C port for communication we recommend using resend processing The driver IC for the RS232C is in full conformance with EIA TIA 232E and CCITT V 28 standards 5 The
89. gt DT9048 DT9049 DT90048 DT90049 DT9050 DT9051 DT90050 DT90051 2 point output x Note The maximum 1 point output for instruction F168 SPD1 is 9 5 kHz Table of PWM output specifications Output number being used Built in high speed counter channel no Related instructions Performance specifications for output frequency Memory area used Control flag Frequency 0 15 Hz to 38 Hz CPU ver 2 0 or later 100 to 1 kHz Duty 0 1 to 99 9 F170 PWM FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions Channel The same channel cannot be used by more than one function Example of prohibited application You cannot share CHO with the high speed counter and pulse output functions number input output contact point The number allocated to each function cannot be used for normal input or outputs Example of prohibited application When using CHO for 2 phase inputting with the high speed counter function you cannot allot XO and X1 to normal inputs When using YO for the pulse output function you cannot allot origin input XO to a normal input When using YO for the pulse output with directional output operating function you cannot allot Y2 directional output to a normal input or output When using the high speed counter with a mode that does not use the
90. in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 4 Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 to 28 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 5 Time settings System registers 30 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 6 Remote I O operation settings System registers 35 and 36 These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote is started and the remote I O update timing 7 MEWNET WO0 MEWNET W P PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET WO MEWNET W P PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 8 MEWNET H PC PLC link settings System register 49 Set the data size to be processed during one scan in the MEWNET H PC PLC link communication 9 Input settings System registers 400 to 406 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 10 Input time constant settings FP1 FP M System registers 404 to 407 Changing the input signal width to be load
91. not necessary to press the system SET button after that point each time the power supply is turned on When the power supply is switched on for the first time after completing the S LINK system wiring an arbitrary error display may appear This does not indicate any abnormal operation If the system SET button is pressed this display is erased If an error address is displayed during operation confirm the address and then turn off the power supply correct the address at the location where the error occurred and turn the power supply on again Check to make sure the error address display has disappeared Do not press the system SET button in this case Ifthe system SET button is pressed after an error has occurred and before it is canceled the error will be canceled If the cause of the error has not been corrected at that point however be aware that the I O device for that address will be skipped during any subsequent checks x Note If the system SET button is pressed without recovery having been made that status will be recognized for that address and any locations where recovery has not been made will not be recognized 4 11 S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 6 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O Device Addresses can be set freely regardless of the position of the I O device connected to the system but problems in the wiring of the main cable such as broken or disconnected wires
92. program are nee tine call set to off Subroutine SUB Indicates the start of the subroutine program n 1 entry E 4508 a Subroutine RET T RET s Ends the subroutine program 1 return Interrupt instructions Interrupt INT Indicates the start of the interrupt program n 1 FA gi Interrupt IRET T rer A Ends the interrupt program 1 return Interrupt ICTL Select interrupt enable disable or clear in S1 and S2 5 control H Horor si sH and execute Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in paretheses 14 40 Availability FP M I Name 7 c i x C14 C24 c56 C C20 2 e amp amp amp C16 cao C72 c2 amp amp amp Subroutine instructions Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A call Output off N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A type subrou tine call Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A entry Subroutine A A A A A A A A A A A A A return Interrupt instructions Interrupt A A A A N A A A A A A A A A Interrupt A A A A N A A A A A A A A A return Interrupt A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A control e A Available N A Not available 14 41 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Special s
93. reset input you can allot the inputs listed in parenthesis in the specifications table to a normal input Example of allowable application When using the high speed counter with no reset input and 2 phase input you can allot X2 to a normal input Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F170 When any of the instructions related to the high speed counter F166 to F170 are executed the control flag special internal relay R903A to R903D corresponding to the used channel turns on When the flag for a channel turns on another instruction cannot be executed using that same channel Example of prohibited application While executing F166 target value match on instruction and flag R903A is in the on state F167 target value match off instruction cannot be executed with CHO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items Restrictions for maximum counting speed pulse output frequency The counting speed when using the high speed counter function will differ depending on the counting mode as shown in the table AY il Example 1 While in the incremental input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH1 if CHO is being used at 8 kHz then CH1 can be used up to 2 kHz AY il Example 2 While in the 2 phase input mode and using the two channels CHO and CH2 if CHO is being used at 1 kHz then CH2 can be used up to 1 kHz The maximum output frequency when
94. set it in the pressure connection tool 2 Insert the wire without removing its insulation until it stops and lightly grip the tool w next page 7 18 FPO Wiring 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 3 After press fitting the wire insert it into the housing 4 When all wires has been inserted fit the semi cover into place semi cover se Note If using a MIL connector for flat cables please specify the order number AXM110915 7 8 1 Contact Puller Pin for Rewiring If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section VAN 7 19 Wiring FPO 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port 7 9 Wiring the RS232C Port When using the RS232C port use the screw down connection type terminal and the wire according to the following procedures FPO Control unit with RS232C port FPO C10CRM C10CRS C14CRM C14CRS C16CT C16CP C32CT C32CP JL RS232C port terminal layout Eng 999 SRG SG Signal Ground l RD Receive Data SD Send Data Suitable wires twisted wire Size AWG 28 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area
95. socket Deseipion Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Model MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 Product number 1840434 Suitable wires twisted wire em Desrpion Control unit Size AWG 24 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area 0 3 to 1 25 mm Analog I O unit Size AWG 28 to 16 Conductor cross sectional area 0 08 to 1 25 mm Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models are marketed by Phoenix Contact Co Manufacturer Cross sectional Product number area mm Phoenix Contact Co AWG 24 Al 0 25 6YE AWG 20 0 5 6WH AWG 18 Al 0 75 6GY AWG 18 Al 1 6RD Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Co Type CRIMPFOX UD6 Product number 12 04 436 When tightening the terminals of the terminal block socket use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product no 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less 7 14 FPO Wiring Procedure eS Notes 7 6 Wiring the Terminal Type 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 7 mm 0 276 in Suitable wire 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block socket until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Clockwise When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch
96. step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed Elapsed value change and read instruction F1 This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the F1 DMV instruction and the special data register DT9044 DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value AY il Example 1 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter example of changing the elapsed value x7 HDF F DMV K3000 DT9044 9 12 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function A Example 2 Reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter and copies it to DT100 7 HDF F1 DMV DT9044 DT100 Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value is automatically transferred from the elapsed value area to the special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Target value match on instruction F166 XA HDF F166 HC1S K10000 Y7 If the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on XB LDF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 If the elapsed value DT9104 and DT9105 DT90104 and DT90105
97. the formula DT90022 DT9022 value 9 SN Note Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 K50 indicates 5 ms Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each the mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode 14 20 Address FPO C10 FPO T32 C14 C16 Name Descriptions C32 SL1 The minimum scan time is stored here Scan Scan time minimum time is calculated using the formula D13023 value Note1 Scan time ms 7 stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The Scan time maximum scan time is calculated using the formula 0190924 1D T9024 value Note 1 Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using ICTL instruction can be monitored here Monitor using Mask condition binary display DT90025 DT9025 monitoring register for 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No Note2 Note2 interrupts INT 0 to 5 23 19 16 INT No 0 Interrupt disabled masked 1 Interrupt enabled unmasked DT90026 DT9026 Not used DT90027 DT9027 Periodical interrupt iM sua aC Note2 Note2 interval INT24 K4 to K3000 10ms to 30s DT90028 DT9028 Not used DT90029 DT9029 Not used DT90030 DT9030 Message 0 Note2 Note2 DT90031 DT
98. with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D 14 112 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 S Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g c14 c24 cse cjg C20 X ra 5 t E t amp c46 cao C72 c32 amp amp t F327 A A A A NA NA NA NA NA A A A P327 F328 A A A A NA NA NIA NA NA A A A P328 F329 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P329 F330 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P330 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 113 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F331 Floating ROFF S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to 8 P331 point type PROFF the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first data to 16 bit decimal point off and the converted data is stored integer con in D version rounding the first decimal point off to integer F332 Floating DROFF S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to 8 P332 point type PDROFF the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first data to 32 bit decimal point off and the converted data is stored integer con in D 1 D version rounding the first decimal point off to integer F333 Float
99. 0 15 Mini DIN 5 pin male mm inch D sub 9 pin male 984 006 82 0 PLC side 1 2 RCM 1 260 3809 eere Sarg SG 1 5 8G SD 2 2 RD M N i Socket 5 Z E JU Inch screw 4 40 8 5 LS s cs AFC8503 AFC85038 FG zoo E 4 CN1 5 4 ER m iH 2 J H m 1 9 RI yz 5 MME 1 X E AFC8513 For connection between FPO FP2 FP M and personal computer mm inch B o E 2 UR EL e 5 z n de 3 e 5 a Mini DIN 5 pin male D sub 25 pin male D j L TIT 531 1 852 Prese 1 2 rane nne ug Sime H 5 8 FG B D FG Lolo 8G 1 7 D Rls 50 2 3 RD 300021500 PN Q s A E 118 11045 9060 sv 5 Lis cs M2 6 screw 6 DR H ay 8 CD 20 ER E AFC8521 AFC8523 For connection between FPO FP2 FP M and FP programmer mm inch L mm inch AFC8521 1000 5 39 370 5 9 5 AFC8523 30002 18 114599 B H oln ae o6 ce 33 32 0 1 312 o6 Hl o8 sie 18 N M2 6 screw Min
100. 0 to X9F 16 to 31 X100 to X10F 32 to 47 X110 to X11F 48 to 63 Output 64 points Y80 to Y8F 64 to 79 Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95 Y100 to Y10F 96 to 111 Y110 to Y11F 112 to 127 FPO Expansion Units The I O allocation of the FPO expansion unit is determined by order of connection Type of Expansion Unit number First expansion Second Third expansion expansion E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E8R Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 E8YR E8YT E8YP Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F E16R E16T E16P Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16YT E16YP Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F E32T E32P Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F 12 8 FPO Specifications Analog I O Unit Allocation Table The I O allocations of the analog I O unit are determined by the position at which the unit is installed Input CHO 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F Second expansion WXA X40 to X4F Third expansion WX6 X60 to X6F Input CH1 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F Output 16 points WY2 Y20 to Y2F WYA Y40 to Y
101. 00us lt 5kHz gt 2 11 Optional Memory FPO 2 2 Special functions Specifications Output point number Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM Not available C14RS Two independent points YO and Y1 no interpolation function Not available Output frequency Not available 40Hz to 10kHz YO Y1 one point output 40Hz to 5kHz YO Y1 two point output Not available Output point number Not available Two points YO and Y1 Not available Output frequency Not available Frequency 0 15Hz to Frequen 38Hz Cy Note 9 0 15Hz to Duty 0 1 to 99 9 1KHz Duty 0 1 to 99 9 Not available Program and system register EEPROM Operation memory Areas which are held if the power supply fails are fixed and are retained by the EEPROM Number of points words of the fixed hold areas in the various memories Counters 4 points Internal relays 32 points Date registers 8 words Note 13 Areas which are held if the power supply fails are fixed and are retained by the EEPROM Number of points words of the fixed hold areas in the various memories Counters 16 points The opera tion memory is backed up using built in charge able sec ondary battery so the hold type memory areas can be speci fied using the pro
102. 01 0000 0000 0010 1001 30 001E 00000000 00011110 0000 0000 0011 0000 31 001F 00000000 00011111 0000 0000 0011 0001 63 003F 00000000 00111111 0000 0000 0110 0011 255 OOFF 00000000 11111111 0000 0010 0101 0101 9999 270F 00100111 00001111 1001 1001 1001 1001 14 137 14 7 ASCII Codes DEL 0 96 8 DEL SPACE DC1 DC3 DC4 ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 0 NUL SOH b b4 1 STX DC2 ETX EOT ENQ NAK ACK SYN BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO RCS 14 138 FPO Record of changes Record of changes JAN 1997 JUL 1997 JUN 1998 FEB 2004 FEB 2006 JUN 2007 Description of Changes First edition 2nd edition Size change from to B5 Newly addition of FPO transistor output type information 3rd edition Descriptions for FPO control units with RS232C port are added Descriptions for FPO input only and output only type expansion units are added Descriptions for FPO analog I O unit is added 4th edition Programming Manual Chapter 4 ACG M0084 3 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Addition Chapter 8 S LINK Control Unit ARCT1F263E Chapter 8 Connecting the Display Panel Delete Chapter 9 Trial Opera
103. 09 set PSTC F141 Carry flag CLC Turns off the carry flag R9009 1 P141 R9009 reset PCLC 14 86 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 b I Name 5 E 2 o WE 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp t amp C16 C40 C72 c2 amp amp amp Basic function instruction F137 A A A A N A N A A N A A A A A A Special instructions F138 Partly A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P138 N A Note2 F139 Partly A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P139 N A Note2 F140 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P140 F141 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P141 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 The instruction is available for FPO T32 type 14 87 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F142 Watching WDT S The time allowable scan time for the system of 3 P142 dog timer PWDT watching dog timer is changed to S x 0 1 ms for update that scan F143 Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number specified by D1 5 P143 update PIORF to the number specified by D2 F144 Serial data TRNS S n The COM port received flag R9038 is set to offto 5 communica enable reception tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 D N Send
104. 1 S1 lt or S3 1 compare S3 5R900B on S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 5 R900C on F64 Block data BCMP 1 S2 S3 Compares the two blocks beginning with S2 and 7 P64 compare PBCMP S3 to see if they are equal Logic operation instructions F65 16 bit data WAN 1 S2 D 51 AND S2 5 D 7 P65 AND PWAN F66 16 bit data WOR S1 S2 D 51 OR S2 5 D 7 P66 OR PWOR F67 16 bit data XOR S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D 7 P67 exclusive OR PXOR F68 16 bit data XNR S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D 7 P68 exclusive PXNR NOR F69 16 bit data WUNI 81 82 S3 S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 2 D 9 P69 unite PWUNI D When S3 is S82 5 D When S3 is HFFFF 81 gt D 14 72 Availability zx Note1 FP M Note1 Name 3 x E 5 BS C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 2 x u L2 L2 u C16 C40 C72 C32 u u u u Data compare instructions F60 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P60 F61 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P61 F62 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P62 F63 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P63 F64 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P64 Logic operation instructions F65 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P65 F66 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P66 F67 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P67 F68 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P68 F69 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P69 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ F
105. 13 F356 Eaay PID EZPID 1 82 S3 Temperature control PID can be easily performed 10 S4 using the image of a temperautre controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has 6 P373 revision PDTR changed since the previous execution internal detection relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area specified by S 1 S 6 P374 revision PDDTR has changed since the previous execution internal detection relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution 14 118 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 Name 3 I 7 o we 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 N o t amp 2 amp c16 C40 C72 02 amp amp ttu F351 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P351 F352 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P352 F353 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P353 F354 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P354 N A N A N A N A Note3 Note5 Note2 Note2 Time series processing instruction F355 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A F356 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A
106. 15 file register PCBFL remembering preceding bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank number back to the 2 P416 file register PPBFL bank before F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL bank number instruction 14 120 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 Name E 2 o we Xs 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N t amp 2 amp c16 C40 C72 02 amp amp titu Index register bank processing instructions F410 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P410 F411 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P411 F412 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P412 File register bank processing instructions F414 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A P414 F415 N A N A NA N A N A NA NA N A N A N A A N A P415 F416 N A N A N A N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A A N A P416 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 121 14 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Model Display Display method FP1 FP M FP2 FP3 FP10SH LED ERROR Continu
107. 15 of S are stored in bit n 8 P240 column PCOLM of D to DC 15 conversion F241 Bit column to LINE S n D The values of bit n of S to S 15 are stored in 8 P241 bit line PLINE bits 0 to 15 of D conversion F250 Binary data BTOA S1 S2 n D Converts multiple binary data to multiple ASCII 12 ASCII data conversion F251 ASCII gt ATOB S1 S2 n D Converts multiple ASCII data to multiple binary 12 binary data data conversion F252 ASCII data ACHK S1 S2 n Checks the ASCII data strings to be used in F251 10 check ATOB instruction Character strings instructions F257 Comparing SCMP 1 S2 These instructions compare two specified character 10 P257 character strings and output the judgment results to a special strings internal relay F258 Character SADD 1 92 D These instructions couple one character string with 12 P258 string another coupling F259 Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the number of 6 P259 characters in characters in a character string a character string F260 Search for SSRC 1 S2 D The specified character is searched in a character 10 P260 character string string F261 Retrieving RIGHT 1 S2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of 8 P261 data from characters from the right side of the character character string strings right side 14 100 Availability A Available N
108. 153 into PRMWT D MEWNET F remote I O slave station MEWNET F slave station F154 Machine MCAL n The machine language program is called 3 P154 language PMCAL program call F155 Sampling SMPL Starts sampling data 1 P155 PSMPL F156 Sampling STRG When the trigger of this instruction turns on the 1 P156 trigger PSTRG sampling trace stops F157 Time addition CADD 1 S2 D The time after S2 1 S2 elapses from the time of 9 P157 PCADD 5112 9141 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F158 Time CSUB 1 2 D The time that results from subtracting S2 1 S2 9 P158 substruction PCSUB from the time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F159 Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an external device 7 P159 communica PMTRN through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM tion port F161 MCU serial MRCV S D1 D2 Data is received from external equipment via the 7 P161 port PMRCV COM port of the specified MCU reception 14 90 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 XI Name 3 I 7 5 las ET c14 C24 C56 C20 2 5 la la n C16 n n a L2 we u C16 C40 C72 C32 u u u u F149 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P149 F150 N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P150 N A Note2 F151 N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P151 N A Note2 F152 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A
109. 2 11 Specifications FPO 12 9 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Decimal con stants Constant Numbering Function C32 SL1 K 32768 to K32767 for 16 bit operation K 2147483648 to K2147483647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal constants 55 Notes HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation 1 There are two unit types the hold type that saves the conditions that exist just before turning the power off or changing from the RUN mode to PROG mode and the non hold type that resets them These areas can be specified as hold type or non hold type by setting system register For the FPO T32 the selection of hold type and non hold type can be changed by the setting of system register For the FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 that area is fixed and allotted the numbers as shown below Hold type and non hold type areas item C10CC1i4 Ci6 C32 SL1 Timer Non hold type All points Counter Non hold type From the set value to C139 From the set value to C127 Hold type 4 points elapsed values C140 to C143 16 points elapsed values C128 to C143 Internal relay Non hold type 976 points RO to R60F 61 words WRO to WR60 880 points RO to R54F 55 words WRO to WR54 Hold type 32 points R610 to R62F 2 words WR61 to WR62 128 points R550 to R62F 8 words WR55 to WR62 Data register Non hold ty
110. 22 FOMV K300 DT311 en S FiesPLs DT310 Ho DT311 Speed 300 Hz Emergency stop over limit If X7 turns off while a pulse is being output from YO the output of the pulse is stopped X7 I pr row H8 DT9052 Fo MV HO DT9052 Pulse output control clear High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Troubleshooting flowchart if a pulse is not output when instruction F168 SPD1 executed Yes Remedy problem Remedy problem Remedy problem Modify elapsed value Modify elapsed value No Special internal relay R903A or R903B is already on Yes No Control clear flag for special data regis ter DT9052 DT9005 is on No Yes HSC CHO or CH1 is set to system register 400 Yes No Elapsed value tried to output pulse in forward direction at Yes No Elapsed valu tried to output pulse in reverse direction at HFF8000 Yes No Set to home return mode No Set to absolute mode No Please contact your dealer F168 SPD1 o Ko Yes Remedy problem Not set to KO or K1 First word of data table is not se to incremental 0 absolute 1 or home return 2 Yes Remedy problem No Second word o data table is set to 40 or initial speed or maximum speed No Remedy
111. 2A 30 V DC 4 5 A maximum per common at Resistance load Output points per C10RM 2 points common 1 point common 1 point common common C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM 4 points common 1 point common 1 point common C14CRM C14RS C14CRS Response time OFF ON approx 10 ms ON OFF approx 8 ms Mechanical life time 20 000 000 operations or more Electrical life time 100 000 operations or more Surge absorber None Operating mode indicator LED 2 16 FPO Optional Memory 2 2 Specifications 2 2 4 2 Transistor Output Type FPO transistor output types C16T C16CT C16P C16CP C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP Item Description Insulation method optical coupler Output type open collector Rated load voltage NPN open collector type 5 to 24 V DC Note PNP open collector type 24 V DC Operating load voltage range NPN open collector type 4 75 to 26 4 V DC PNP open collector type 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 0 1A Max surge current 0 3A Output points per C16T C16CT 8 points common common C16P C16CP C32T C32CT 16 points common C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less ON state voltage drop 1 5 V or less External power Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC supply for driving internal circuit Current YO and Y1 5 mA 1 point except YO and Y1 3 mA 1 point Response time OFF
112. 2CT T32CP Illustration FPO C32T Reference measurements for wiring 3 5 0 138 Approx 78 0 3 071 gt 60 0 2 362 30 0 1 181 60 0 2 362 pm EXPANSION CONNECTOR e ceo 55 S d 5 e 5 i O y 3 5 0 138 unit mm in 13 4 FPO Dimensions 13 2 FPO Power Supply Unit 13 1 5 FPO S LINK Control Unit 9 60 0 394 2362 M eUUUU UUUUS A d Fi FI CONNECTOR 5 90 0 5 19 543 2 1 amp O Y 3 09 354 295 17 DIN standard rail 569 DIN EN50022 35 mm 1 378 inch width unit mm in attachment gap 13 2 FPO Power Supply Unit 35 0 19 2 60 0 1 378 756 2 362 NA Input 90 0 3 543 1 terminal a Connection terminal f AN m d Nw Output AN terminal a LIELELELELELELELELELELELELEA
113. 3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error in the status display function A Available 14 129 Error code Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP2 FP10SH FP2SH FP3 E43 E44 E45 System watching dog timer error Slave staiton connecting time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Selec table Selec table Selec table Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the System watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using System register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the System register 35 Selection of operation status using System register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90017 DT90018 to find the instruc
114. 3 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 14 31 Steps Name Boolean Symbol Description Note Leading DFI Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1 edge differ TER edge of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection ential initial is possible on the first scan execution type Set SET Y R LE Output is set to and held at on 3 5 Reset RST Y R LE Output is set to and held at off 3 r Keep KP SeN Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on 1 2 Reset No operation NOP No operation 1 Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 14 32 Availability FP1 FP M x Name 7 o x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp amp amp amp C16 cao C72 c32 t amp tjt Leading N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A edge differ ential initial execution type Set A A A A A A A A A A A A A Reset A A A A A A A A A A A A A Keep A A A A A A A A A A A A A No operation A A A A A A A A A A A A A e A Availab
115. 4 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD E BCD data Decimal Hexadecimal Binary data Binary Coded Decimal 0 0000 00000000 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 0001 00000000 00000001 0000 0000 0000 0001 2 0002 00000000 00000010 0000 0000 0000 0010 3 0003 00000000 00000011 0000 0000 0000 0011 4 0004 00000000 00000100 0000 0000 0000 0100 5 0005 00000000 00000101 0000 0000 0000 0101 6 0006 00000000 00000110 0000 0000 0000 0110 7 0007 00000000 00000111 0000 0000 0000 0111 8 0008 00000000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 9 0009 00000000 00001001 0000 0000 0000 1001 10 000A 00000000 00001010 0000 0000 0001 0000 11 000B 00000000 00001011 0000 0000 0001 0001 12 000C 00000000 00001100 0000 0000 0001 0010 13 000D 00000000 00001101 0000 0000 0001 0011 14 000E 00000000 00001110 0000 0000 0001 0100 15 OOOF 00000000 00001111 0000 0000 0001 0101 16 0010 00000000 00010000 0000 0000 0001 0110 17 0011 00000000 00010001 0000 0000 0001 0111 18 0012 00000000 00010010 0000 0000 0001 1000 19 0013 00000000 00010011 0000 0000 0001 1001 20 0014 00000000 00010100 0000 0000 0010 0000 21 0015 00000000 00010101 0000 0000 0010 0001 22 0016 00000000 00010110 0000 0000 0010 0010 23 0017 00000000 00010111 0000 0000 0010 0011 24 0018 00000000 00011000 0000 0000 0010 0100 25 0019 00000000 00011001 0000 0000 0010 0101 26 001A 00000000 00011010 0000 0000 0010 0110 27 001B 00000000 00011011 0000 0000 0010 0111 28 001C 00000000 00011100 0000 0000 0010 1000 29 001D 00000000 000111
116. 4 V tary power off time C16 C32 T32 SL1 10 ms at 21 6 V 10 msat24 V Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Storage temperature 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Storage humidity Breakdown voltage 30 to 85 RH non condensing 500 V AC for 1 minute between I O terminal and power supply ground terminal 1500 V AC for 1 minute between I O terminal and power supply ground ter minal relay output type only Insulation resistance min 100 MQ measured with a 500 V DC megger between I O terminal and ground terminal Vibration resistance 10 Hz to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm 0 030 in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s or more 4 times on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1 us based on in house measure ments Operating condition 2 2 1 1 Weight Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust approx 100 g 3 53 oz approx 120 g 4 24 oz approx 105 g 3 70 oz C16 approx 85 g 3 00 oz C32 approx 115 g 4 06 oz approx 80 g 2 82 oz approx 90 g 3 18 oz IOL TC4 approx 85 g 3 00 oz T32 approx 125 g 4 41 oz TC8 approx 95 g 3 35 oz E8R E8YR E8X E8YT E8YP E16RS E16RM E16T E16P E16X E16YT E16YP E32T E32P CCLS approx 90 g 3 17 oz approx 80 g 2 82 oz approx 65 g 2 29 oz
117. 4F WY6 Y60 to Y6F A D Converter Unit and Thermocouple Unit The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which contains the conversion data switch flag Type First expansion Second Third expansion expansion Input CHO 2 4 6 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F Input CH1 3 5 7 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F D A Converter Unit The data of each channel switches and then reads or writes by the user program which contains the conversion data switch flag Type First expansion Second expansion Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output CHO 2 4 6 WY2 WY4 WY6 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Output CH1 3 5 7 wy3 WY5 WY7 16 points Y30 to Y3F Y50 to Y5F Y70 to Y7F Third expansion Link Unit The I O allocation of the link unit is determined by order of connection Type First expansion Second Third expansion expansion X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F IOL Input 32 points X20 to X3F output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Note Please verify with the manual for the FPO CC Link slave unit 12 9 Specifications FPO 12 2 O Allocation Table Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input output relays X and Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed a
118. 5 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gases Excessive airborne dust or metal particles Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Excessive vibration or shock Direct sunlight Water in any form including spray or mist Avoid noise interference from the following items Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges If noise occurs in the power supply line even after the above countermeasures are taken it is recommended to supply power through an insolated transformer noise filter or like w next page Installation FPO 6 2 Important Notes e Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat e 4 e 2 didi Lda Installation which Installations such that the I O blocks the air duct connectors or I O terminals face down Horizontal installation of the unit Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such as heaters transformers or large scale resistors w next page FPO Installation 6 2 Important Notes e Installation space Leave
119. 5 seconds R102 TMX 0 K5 9 15 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function Wiring example FPO Input terminal Encoder input Operation X5 oo start Encoder Output terminal Inverter High speed YO Run Stop switching Yi Fast Slow e E 4 frt COM Speed 9 16 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function Positioning operations with a double speed inverter When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R903A R103 R100 DF H Positioning operations running R100 R100 R101 Positioning operations start 5 Start signal to inverter High speed signal to inverter R100 F61 DCMP K4500 DT 9044 R100 R900C R102 Reaches deceleration point R102 Y1 H DF 1 RJ Deceleration R903A R100 TO R103 oO eae Completion pulse 0 5 seconds 9 17 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 1 Outline of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and control settings The pulse function enables positioning control by use in combinatio
120. 6 300 bps If 19200 bps is set for both the tool port and RS232C port H100 should be written 14 12 FPO Item Add ress Name Default value Descriptions RS232C port setting 412 Selection of operation Not used KO Using FPWIN GR Not used Computer link General purpose communication Using FP programmer II RS232C port is not used K1 Computer link mode when connecting C NET K2 Serial data communication mode general port 413 Communication format Start code None Terminal code CR Stop bit 1 bit Paritycheck With odd Data length 8 bits H3 Using FPWIN GR Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 2 The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Start code STX not exist STX exist Using FP programmer II Specify the setting contents using H constants 15 6 0 TTT LJALJA Start code 0 No STX 1 STX Terminal code 00 CR 01 CR LF 10 None 11 ETX Stop bit 0 1bit 1 2 bits Parity check 00 None With odd 11 With even Data length 7 bits 1 8 bits 414 Baud rate setting Setting by programming tool software 9600 H1 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 1200 bps 600 bps 300 bps 415 U
121. 84 registers KO Available type T32 Hold or non hold setting 14 for step ladder process an ee Available type T32 20 Disable or enable setting Disable Disable will be syntax error KO for duplicated output KO Enable will not be syntax error K1 Operation setting when an 23 I O verification error Stop Stop K0 cc r KO Operate K1 Action oh eot 26 Operation setting when an Stop Stop KO operation error occurs KO Operate K1 Operation settings when 27 communication error Operate Stop KO occurs in the remote I O K1 Operate K1 S LINK system Note The setting values of the system registers No 6 7 8 and 14 becomes invalid with the types other than T32 14 7 FPO Item Add ress Name Default value Descriptions Time setting 31 Wait time setting for multi frame communication 6500 ms K2600 10 ms to 81900 ms K4 to K32760 Used of default setting K2600 6500 ms is recommended set value 2 5 ms Wait time setting for multi frame communi cation ms t In programming tool software enter the time a number divisible by 2 5 In FP Programmer IL enter the set value equal to the time divided by 2 5 34 Constant value settings for scan time 0 ms K0 2 5 ms to 160 ms K1 to K64 Scans once each specified time interval 0 KO Normal scan set value x 2 5 ms Constant value setting for multi frame communication ms t
122. 9 2 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type C16P C16CP C32P C32CP T32CP 2 21 w next page Optional Memory FPO JOIFESVOUIS cc cui e een ie otek eos 2 22 2 41 CTORS CTOCRS C1TORM C1OCRM 2 22 2 4 2 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM 2 22 2 4 3 CIGIGIBOT 3 iS oct rre es 2 23 244 C16P C16CP secos 2 24 2 4 5 C32T C32CT T32CT a an anaana 2 25 2 4 6 C32P C32CP T32CP 2 26 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type 2 27 FPO Optional Memory 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 Parts and Terminology There are sixteen different control unit types available 1 ONO aA FON 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 C10RS terminal type C14RS terminal type C10CRS with RS232C port terminal type C14CRS with RS232C port terminal type C10RM connector type C14RM connector type C10CRM with RS232C port connector type C14CRM with RS232C port connector type C16T C16P C16CT with RS232C port C16CP with RS232C port C32T C32P C32CT with RS232C port C32CP with RS232C port T32CT with RS232C port T32CP with RS232C port In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each control unit
123. 9031 Message 1 Note2 Note2 tases Message 2 The contents of the specified message are Note2 Note2 stored in these special data registers when F149 Message 3 MSG instruction is executed Note2 Note2 DT90034 DT9034 Message 4 Note2 Note2 DT90035 DT9035 Message 5 Note2 Note2 DT90036 DT9036 Not used The number of data that match the searched DT90037 DT9037 Work 1 for F96 SRC Sata is stored here when F96 SRC instruction instruction is executed Note1 Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time The maximum and minimum values are cleared when each mode is switched between RUN mode and PROG mode Note2 Used by the system 14 21 Address FEO CHG Name Descriptions FPO T32 C14 C16 P C32 SL1 The position of the first matching data counting DT90038 DT9038 F96 SRC fom the starting 16 bit area is stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is executed DT90039 DT9039 to to Not used DT90043 DT9043 The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high DT90044 DT9044 speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the High speed counter high speed counter is automatically transferred elapsed value for ch0 to the special registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 DT90045 The value can be written by
124. A Not available Note1 FP M Note1 3 T Name 3 I 7 o aug Xs 9 C14 C24 C56 Bae C20 o e t amp 2 amp c16 cao C72 02 amp amp amp amp F235 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P235 F236 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P236 F237 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P237 F238 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P238 F240 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P240 F241 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P241 F250 N A Partly A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Note2 F251 N A Partly A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Note2 F252 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Note4 Note3 Character strings instructions F257 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P257 F258 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A NA N A A A A P258 F259 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A N A N A A A A P259 F260 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A N A N A A A A P260 F261 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P261 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP 32k Note3 This instruction is avai
125. A error and replace the unit with a new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave slave station of the MEWNET F link E35 n Stops system is installed on the slave station illegal unit Remove the illegal unit from the error slave station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used remore for 1 0 system exceeds the limitation E36 O Stops Re configure the system so that the RE e limitation number of slots and I O points is within error the specified range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over y o the range is detected in the allocated E37 mapping SOPS vO and MEWNET F map ANATAJA error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available 14 127 Error code Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP2 FP10SH FP2SH FP3 E38 MEWNET F slave I O terminal mapping error Stops mapping for remote I O terminal boards remote I O terminal units and I O link is not correct Re configure the I O map for slave stations according to the I O points of the slave stations gt gt gt E39 IC card read error Stops When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of t
126. A A A A P82 F83 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P83 F84 A A A A A A A A A A A A P84 F85 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P85 F86 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P86 F87 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P87 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 77 Num bas Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F88 32 bit data DABS D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D 3 P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT D Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 3 P89 sign PEXT D extension F90 Decode DECO S n D Decodes part of the data of S and stores itin D 7 P90 PDECO The part is specified by n F91 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 segment 5 P91 decode PSEGT display and stores it in D 1 D F92 Encode ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and stores it in D 7 P92 PENCO The part is specified by n F93 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the n words 7 P93 combine PUNIT of data beginning at S are stored united in order in D F94 16 bit data DIST S n D Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in 7 P94 distribute PDIST distriuted to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D F95 Character ASC S D Twelve characters of the characer constants of
127. A A A A A A A A A A A A shift register Control instructions Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A control relay Master A A A A A A A A A A A A A control relay end Jump A A A A A A A A A A A A A Label Auxiliary N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A jump Label e A Available N A Not available 14 37 STPE Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 4 5 LEL n from there the number of jumps is set in S Noten Label LBL Loop n SH 1 Break BRK sats Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger 1 turns on in the TEST RUN mode only End ED oA The operation of program is ended Indicates the end of a 1 main program Conditional CNDE E The operation of program is ended when the trigger turns 1 end l on Eject EJECT m Adds page break fo ruse when printing 1 Step ladder instructions Start step SSTP iem The start of program n for process control 3 Next step NSTL Start the specified process n and clear the process 3 currently started Scan execution type NSTP Start the specified process n and clear the process 3 currently started Pulse execution type Clear step CSTP ae Resets the specified process n 3 Clear multi SCLR ZI Resets multiple processes specified by
128. F149 MSG instruction is executed R9027 Note Remote mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to REMOTE R9028 Not used Note Used by the system 14 16 FPO Address Name Description R9029 Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay Forcing flag Note timer counter contacts R902A External interrupt Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by Note enable flag the ICTL instruction R902B Note Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs R902C to R902F Not used R9030 R9031 Not used R9032 u d port mode When General use port is selected K2 goes on R9033 Printout instruction Turns on while a F147 PR instruction is executed flag Turns off when a F147 PR instruction is not executed This is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first R9034 PE during RUN scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode 3 CPU Ver 2 1 or later available S LINK communi Turns on when the S LINK error ERR 1 3 or 4 occurs R9035 i cation error flag using S LINK system R9036 S LINK communica Turns on when communication is taking place with an S tion status flag LINK input Ooutput unit R9037 Nasen See ey ee Turns on when the serial data communication error occurs tion error flag RS232C reception Turns on when a terminator is received during
129. FP0804 and install according to the dimensions shown below For a diagram showing detailed dimensions of the FPO flat type mounting plate see section 13 5 FPO flat type mounting plate 5 w 5 Mounting panel Li 2 S tu el e e E AFPO804 E E Y o i E Procedure 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit 2 Install the FPO unit on the FPO flat type mounting plate 3 Align the expansion hooks with the plate and press the hooks back down E 3 M FPO flat type mounting E DEM plate s 8E ow E 4 x Notes e The FPO flat type mounting plate AFP0804 cannot be used for an expansion unit w next page 6 10 FPO Installation 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate e An FPO unit with an attached FPO flat type mounting plate can also be installed sideways on a DIN rail FPO flat type mounting plate 6 11 Installation FPO 6 5 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 12 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 Wiring Safety Instructions cece ees 7 3 7 1 1 Interlock Circuit llli 7 3 7 1 2 Emergency Stop Circuit 7 3 7 1
130. H 3 5 it i pelle unit mm in 13 5 Dimensions FPO 189 3 Mounting on DIN Rail 13 3 Mounting on DIN Rail ae DIN rail N N Ke j eo ike XM M o d o D 2 Xr X 3t w7 X F X7 wF w7 foo oo n n n 6 a i B E H 300 Fao E soa Fao aA sO HAH E 300 E 5 m 5 ti i T Ex es sales be scl DIN rail n ss Bliss Eos oa S8 E Bm a o 55 951 0 55 551 55 55 ao 5 8 a o N daw oo D alus alla A s 5 o P 5 B AH Sila al al H al B alls ee 8 Ds 5 Ds eH eo co ro ro ro rol ap N ROG vg r Ww v Yo YEF Wr wF W 7 t oO og oo og oo Ww 4 B B B B gak desp uu us uy esi oi ds OC I H H H H H H H H e 5 s a sci ma tac 55 o 5 salles G EFATE OE n2 58 o al oo 5 5
131. L Be sure to write the instruc tion for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP Changing Modes in FP Programmer II Changing program modes FP Programmer II is normally in PROG EDIT mode which does not allow unintentional rewriting of programs To perform a rewrite during RUN the mode must be changed to RUN EDIT mode Change the mode as shown below After the rewrite change back to PROG EDIT mode to prevent accidental rewriting Procedure for changing to RUN EDIT mode Procedure for changing to PROG EDIT mode Eyes rs oC estne e e Precautions During Programming FPO 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 8 1 Method of Rewriting Constant in FP Programmer II Timer set value _ This method rewrites the Ben ae value in the program XO TMX 5 K 30 prog T5 YO Rewrite Method Using FP Programmer II Example of changing the set value of timer 5 from K30 to K50 Procedure 1 Read the address containing the timer instruction C5 rev e Ls C 9 FP 2 Clear the constant K30 3 Enter the new constant K50 Operation and Cautions After the Change After the change the timer or counter in operation will continue to run Operation based on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condi
132. LED is turned ON the program execution time is too long Check e f instructions such as JP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan can never finish e that interrupt instructions are executed in succession 11 2 3 All LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 gt Check the power supply wiring Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FPO control unit is in the range of the rating Be sure to check the fluctuation in the power supply Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FPO control unit is shared with them If the LEDs on the FPO control unit turn ON at this moment the capacity of the power supply is not enough to control other devices as well Prepare another power supply for other devices or increase the capacity of the power supply 11 7 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Check of output condition output indicator LEDs are ON lt Procedure 1 gt Check the wiring of the loads lt Procedure 2 gt Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads If the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again If the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the FPO s output circuit Please contact your dealer Check of output condition output indicator LEDs are OFF P
133. M p eB en B is is B PRO Wc w7 LAN E f j o oo oo og 8 8 8 H HH 5 H H eB Li z LH B sce oo e o0 oo B 9 oo oo 60 a B B B ERI RES B B EIER MS E 8 E NE T n IRE co co co az 5 I 5 zn KS 5 8 B B REIS Oo VN Sey Cd NESS RA Control unit First Second Third expansion unit expansion unit expansion unit Maximum possible expansion is with a total of 3 units Contollable I O Points Type of Control unit When the expansion unit is When the expansion unit is control unit only the same output type as the a transistor output type control unit C10R max 58 points max 106 points C14R max 62 points max 110 points C16T C16P max 112 points max 112 points C32 T32 max 128 points max 128 points Overview FPO 1 3 Combination Possibilities 1 3 Combination Possibilities 1 3 1 Relay Output Type Units First Second Third aded of Control expansion expansion i expansion P unit unit I O unit 10 Input 6 Output 4 nput 6 Output 4 Es 14 Input 8 Output 6 E nput 8 Output 6 10 8 Input 10 Output 8 nput 6 Output 4 Input 4 Output 4 4 Input 12 Output 10 nput 8 Output 6 Input 4 Output 4 c
134. MV H 0 DT 90054 a 0 second FO MV H 512 DT90055 Inputs 12th hour 5th day Fo MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time If you changed the values of DT90054 to DT90057 with the data monitor functions of programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with XO turns on X0 I pF F0 MV H 1 DT90058 Correct to 0 second At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if the between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 second and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 second Note After discharging the battery including when the power is turned on for the first time the values of DT90053 to DT90058 change at random Once the time and date have been set these values will function normally 14 25 Address Name Descriptions FPO 32 C14 016 d C32 SL1 15 1211109 8 7 4 3 0 DT9059 DT90059 Error flag of Error flag of RS232C port tool port Serial co
135. N Power on ge Even if XO was initially on the input condition XO for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output is obtained A il Example 2 CT counter instruction CT 100 X1 Add R9014 mea R9014 CT 100 X1 RUN Power on X0 CT100 counting M operation Even if XO was initially on the input condition XO for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented 8 15 Precautions During Programming FPO 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction Instructions which leading edge detection compare the condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution and execute the instruction only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point AY il Example 1 Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions mco X1 YO HDF MCE 0 Time chart 1 X0 X1 YO dip of DF The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has instruction not changed since the time of the prev
136. N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P231 N A N A N A N A Note3 Note6 Note2 Note2 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later Note3 This instruction is available for FP 32k Note5 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 3 10 or later Note4 This function is available for FP X Ver2 0 or later Note6 This instruction is available for FP X V1 13 or later 14 99 Num bor Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F235 16 bit binary GRY S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray 6 P235 data Gray PGRY codes and the converted result is stored in the D code conversion F236 32 bit binary DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of S 1 S to gray 8 P236 data Gray PDGRY code and the converted result is stored in the code D 1 D conversion F237 16 bit gray GBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and 6 P237 code PGBIN the converted result is stored in the D binary data conversion F238 32 bit gray DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S to binary data 8 P238 code PDGBIN and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D binary data conversion F240 Bit line to bit COLM S n D The values of bits 0 to
137. N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P98 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 79 Num bas Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F99 Data table CMPW S D1 D2 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between 7 P99 shift in and PCMPW D1 and D2 that are 0 are compressed and compress shifted in order toward D2 F100 Right shift of SHR D n Shifts the n bits of D to the right 5 P100 multiple bits PSHR n bits ina 16 bit data F101 Left shift of SHL D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left 5 P101 multiple bits PSHL n bits ina 16 bit data F102 Right shift of DSHR D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified 5 P102 n bits ina 32 PDSHR by D 1 D to the right bit data F103 Left shift of n DSHL D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified 5 P103 bits in a 32 PDSHL by D 1 D to the left bit data F105 Right shift of BSR D Shifts the one digit of data of D to the right 3 P105 one hexade PBSR cimal digit 4 bit F106 Left shift of BSL D Shifts the one digit of data of D to the left 3 P106 one hexade PBSL cimal digit 4 bit F108 Right shift of BITR D1 D2 n Shifts the n bits of data range by D1 and D2 to 7 P108 multiple bits PBITR the right
138. N A N A N A Note4 Note4 Compare instructions F373 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P373 F374 N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P374 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH CPU Ver 1 5 or later Note3 This instruction is available for FPX 32k Note4 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FPX 32k Note5 This instruction is available for FP X V1 13 or later 14 119 Num bes Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register IO to ID bank number change over 4 P410 index regis PSETB ter bank number F411 Changing the CHGB n Index register IO to ID bank number change over 4 P411 index regis PCHGB with remembering preceding bank number ter bank number F412 Restoring the POPB 2 Changes index register IO to ID bank number 2 P412 index regis PPOPB back to the bank before F411 CHGB P411 ter bank PCHGB instruction number File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the SBFL n File register bank number change over 4 P414 file register PSBFL bank number F415 Changing the CBFL n File register bank number change over with 4 P4
139. N GR Click the Clear Error button in the status display menu described on the previ ous page Using FP programmer II Press the keys as shown on the right SHIFT DELT ENT sc J INST Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e n the PROG mode the power supply can be turned OFF and then ON again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared 9 An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Procedure 2 gt Follow the procedures described in the table of error codes 8 Note When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 If this happens monitor the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 11 6 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of FPO has been stopped lt Procedure 1 gt Set the mode switch from RUN to PROG and turn the power OFF and then ON If the ERROR ALARM LED is turned ON again there is probably an abnormality in the FPO Please contact your dealer If the ERROR ALARM LED is blinked go to section 11 2 1 lt Procedure 2 gt Set the mode switch from PROG to RUN If the ERROR ALARM
140. NA A A NA NIA NA NA NA NA NA A A A P263 F264 NA A A N A NIA NA NA NA NA NA A A A P264 F265 NA A A N NIA NIA NIA NA NA NA A A A P265 Integer type data processing instructions F270 NA A A Partly N A N A NIA NIA NA NA A A A P270 NA F271 NA A A Partly N A NIA NIA NA NA NA A A A P271 NA F272 NA A A Partly NWA N A N A N A NA NA A A A P272 NA F273 NA A A Partly N A NIA NIA NA NA NA A A A P273 N A F275 NA A A Partly N A NIA NIA NA NA NA A A A P275 NA F276 NA A A Partly N A NIA NIA NA NA NA A A A P276 NA e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 14 103 Ps Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F277 Sort word SORT S1 92 S3 The word data with sign from the area specified by 8 P277 data 16 bit PSORT S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT S1 82 S3 The double word data with sign from the area 8 P278 word data PDSORT specified b S1 ato S2 are sorted in ascending 32 bit order the smallest word is first or descending order the l
141. O 7 4 Input Wiring 7 4 2 LED Equipped Reed Switch When a LED is connected to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the ON voltage applied to the FPO input circuit is greater than 19 2 V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series Input terminal LED equipped 19 2 V DC reed switch or more FPO 7 4 8 Two Wire Type Sensor If the input of the FPO does not turn OFF because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Input terminal Two wire Bleeder type sensor resistor FPO Internal circuit I Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor kQ The OFF voltage of the FPO input is 2 4 V therefore select an R value so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V The impedance of the FPO input terminal is 5 6 kO The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is R lt or NEL 5 6x1 24 The wattage W of the resistor is We Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 7 10 FPO Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring 7 4 A LED Equipped Limit Switch If the input of the FPO does not turn OFF because of the leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Input LED equipped terminal limit switch
142. P X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 73 Num bor Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data conversion instructions F70 Block check BCC 1 S2 S3 Creates the code for checking the data specified by 9 P70 code PBCC D S2 and S3 and stores it in D calculation The calculation method is specified by S1 F71 Hexadecimal HEXA 1 S2 D Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 7 P71 data ASCII PHEXA and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D code Example HABCD H 42 41 44 43 BADC F72 ASCII code AHEX 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and 7 P72 Hexadeci PAHEX S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D mal data Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DCBA F73 4 digit BCD BCDA S1 S2 D Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 7 P73 data ASCII PBCDA S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D code Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 2143 F74 ASCII code ABCD S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and 9 P74 4 digit PABCD S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D BCD data Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 4321 F75 16 bit binary BINA S1 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by 7 P75 data gt ASCII PBINA S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 code bytes Example K 100 H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 001 F76 ASCII c
143. P58 BCD data PDB 1 decrement 14 70 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 ri Ex Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g 614 c24 cse cjg C20 lt 4 ra 5 t E t amp c16 C40 C72 c32 amp amp amp F48 A A A A A NA A A A A A P48 F50 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P50 F51 A A A A A A NA A A A A A P51 F52 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P52 F53 A A A A INA A A NAT A A A A A P53 F55 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P55 F56 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P56 F57 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P57 F58 A A A A A A A NA A A A A A P58 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 71 Num bor Name Boolean Operand Description Steps Data compare instructions F60 16 bit data CMP S1 S2 S1 S2 5 R900A on 5 P60 compare PCMP S1 S2 R900B on 81 S2 5 R900C on F61 32 bit data DCMP S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 on 9 P61 compare PDCMP S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 5 R900B on S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on F62 16 bit data WIN 81 S2 S3 S1 S3 R900A on 7 P62 band PWIN S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 gt R900B on compare S1 lt S2 R900C on F63 32 bit data DWIN S1 S2 S3 S141 81 S341 S3 R900A on 13 P63 band PDWIN 5211 S2 lt or S1
144. PO slim type mounting plates to be connected tighten the corner screws eo unit mm in 60 0 2 362 70 0 2 756 unit mm in Dimensions FPO 13 5 FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 13 5 FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 2 2 441 9 60 0 2 362 N 5 eo el 6 5 5 AFP0804 Y 4 0 0 157 yo Ll 2 2 0 087 unit mm in Mounting hole Dimensions when mounted on DIN rail dimensions B mm in y c o e a z 25 0 98 5 a 5 t 5 5 o on O Y B dir 5 0 0 197 g 1 30 1 18 unit mm in me Note Cannot be used if system is expanded 13 8 FPO Dimensions 13 6 Detailed Specifications of Cables 13 6 Detailed Specifications of Cables E AFC8503 and AFC8503S For connection between FPO FP2 FP M and personal computer 3000 1500 118 110 5 9060 24 99
145. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPO User s Manual FPO User s Manual ARCT1F389E 2 07 06 http www mew co jp ac e fasys Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safe This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assure in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could lead to abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation Do n
146. Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions Using the Leading Edge Detection Operation DF leading edge differential instructions Count input for CT instructions Count input for F118 UDC instructions Shift input for SR instructions Shift input for F119 LRSR instructions NSTP instructions Leading Edge Detection Method An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on Standard operation Leading edge differential operation Trigger of Trigger of On on Operation of Operation of of i instruction instruction i Executed only one time Executed every scan The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed 8 13 Precautions During Programming FPO 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method Precautions When Using an Instruction Which Performs Leading Edge Detection When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected The instruction is
147. ROM write instruction is 10 000 or less 15 If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is being executed the data written by the P13 instruction may not be written in the EEPROM properly Also the area where the internal relays data registers and timer counter are held may not be held properly Do not turn off the power supply while the P13 instruction is being executed 11 2 13 Optional Memory FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 8 Input Specifications Item Description S Insulation method optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Rated input current approx 4 3 mA at 24 V DC Input impedance approx 5 6 kQ Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Input points per C10RM 6 points common common Note 1 C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM 8 points common C14CRM C14RS C14CRS C16T C16CT 8 points common C16P C16CP C32T C32CT 16 points common C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP ON voltage ON current 19 2 V or less 3 mA or less OFF voltage OFF current 2 4 V or more 1 mA or more Response time OFF lt gt ON 50 us or less at X0 X1 Note 2 at 24 V DC and 25 100 us or less at X2 to X5 Note 2 2 ms or less at X6 to ON lt OFF the same as above Operating mode indicator LED Ime Notes 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply 2 through X5 are inputs for the
148. Relay out put 2A Connection type Terminal block ex connector FPO C10RS FPO0 C10RM Product No P02123 P02113 FPO C10 Control Unit with RS232C port EEPROM 2 7k steps Input 6 Output 4 24V DC Sink Sourse common Relay out put 2A minal block FPO0 C10CRS P02123C ex conneci FP0 C10CRM P02113C FPO C14 Control Unit EEPROM 2 7k steps Input 8 Output 6 24V DC Sink Sourse common Relay out put 2A minal block ex connector FPO C14RS FP0 C14RM P02223 P02213 FPO C14 Control Unit with RS232C port EEPROM 2 7k steps Input 8 Output 6 24 V DC Sink Sourse common Relay out put 2A minal block ex conneci FPO C14CRS FP0 C14CRM P02223C P02213C EEPROM 16 Input 8 24V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FPO C16T AFP02343 2 7k steps Output 8 Sink Sourse otuput NPN FPO C16 common 01A Control Unit Transister FP0 C16P AFP02353 otuput PNP 0 1A EEPROM 16 Input 8 24V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FPO C16CT AFP02343C FPO C16 2 7k steps Output 8 Sink Sourse otuput NPN Control Unit common 01 with RS232C Transister FP0 C16CP AFPO02353C port otuput PNP 0 1A EEPROM 32 Input 16 24 V DC 24 V DC Transister MIL connector FPO CS32T AFP02543 5k steps Output 16 Sink Sourse otuput NPN FPO C32 common 01A Control Unit Transister FP0 C32P AFP02553 otuput
149. S Sr Duplex transmission dis instruction abled while F144 TRNS in execution off struction is being execute on R9039 Transmission completed flag off Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Stored y Y Y Reception A A A Art E E E buffer B B B B B c C C C G m Number of recep lt 1 gt lt 2 gt 3 lt 0 gt 1 25 lt 3 gt tion bytes z Write pointer Number of bytes received is cleared when F144 TRNS instruction is executed Half duplex transmission should be used for general use serial communication Reception is disabled when the reception completed flag R9038 is on Be aware that the reception completed flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress Example If the reception completed flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the error flag R9037 reception completed flag R9038 and transmission completed flag R9039 go off Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 TRNS instruction is being executed Check the transmission completed flag R9039 to determine whether duplex transmission is possible 10 8 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer returns to the initial address i
150. S2 D 81 82 5 D 7 P22 addition P 14 64 Availability zx Note1 FP M Note1 Name 3 T 6 o mnc Xe 9 C14 C24 C56 C20 2 e amp e 8 E fce cao cz2 amp E amp amp F11 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P11 F12 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P12 F12 A A A A F13 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P13 P13 A A A A F14 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P14 F15 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P15 F16 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P16 F17 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P17 F18 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P18 Control instruction F19 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A Binary arithmetic instructions F20 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P20 F21 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P21 F22 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P22 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP e FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions except for P13 PICWT instruction are not available 14 65 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F23 32 bit data D 1 S2 D 5111 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 11 P23 addition PD F25 16 bit data S D D S D 5 P25 subtraction P F26 32 bit data D S D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D 7 P26 subtraction PD F27 16 bit data S1 S2 D S1 S2 5 D 7 P27 subr
151. T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT 12552 etl OU Rey 13 4 13 1 5 FPO S LINK Control Unit 13 5 FPO Power Supply Unit 13 5 Mounting on DIN HABI s ce ote late wee Res otek 13 6 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 13 7 FPO Flat Type Mounting 13 8 Detailed Specifications of Cables 13 9 Connection between RS232C port and PC 13 10 Dimensions FPO 13 2 FPO Dimensions 13 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit 13 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit 13 1 1 FPO C10RS C10CRS C14RS C14CRS E8RS E16RS Illustration FPO C14RS Reference measurements for wiring 8 5 0 335 3 5 0 138 25 0 0 984 Approx 100 0 3 937 60 0 2 362 60 0 2 362 E 8 i 5 EXPANSION O E CONNECTOR le C a 8 I Td eo B Q O pm aS pd i o cl o o pm E o o O 5 FE S oO e k 8 Y 9 8 Y F E WwW e e 5 7 5 0 295 DIN rail DIN EN50022 35 1 378 attachment gapy unit mm in 13 1 2 FPO C10RM C10CRM C14RM C14CRM E8RM E16RM
152. T P 15mA or less 24mA or less FPO E16X 20mA or less 68 8mA or less FPO E16R 20mA or less 100mA or less 34 4mA or less FPO E16T P 25mA or less 34 4mA or less 24mA or less FPO E16YT P 25mA or less 48mA or less FPO ES32T P 40mA or less 68 8mA or less 48mA or less FPO Intelligent unit 20mA or less 100mA or less FP0 A80 20mA or less 60mA or less 4 20mA or less 100mA or less FPO A04I 20mA or less 130mA or less FPO TCA FP0 TC8 25mA or less FPO IOL 30mA or less 40mA or less FPO CCLS 40mA or less 40mA or less Programmable display unit AIGT0030 AIGT0032 AIGT0130 AIGT0132 80mA or less FPO Optional Memory 2 2 Specifications Current consumption example C14RS E32T E16T E16RS X3 xr XT XT 8 Y in ead a aa RRRRRRRE nbuBubo OOOOOU00 je D 00003 0000001 do o o o lo com a At power supply connector of expansion I O unit FPO E16RS Current co
153. _ Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel only 2 OR XY Wi SURE for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading OTT P Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for 2 edge out 4 one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing edge OTL P Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for 2 out Ly I one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Alternative ALT YRLE Inverts the output condition on off each time the leading 3 out edge of the trigger is detected AND stack ANS Connects the multiple instruction blocks serially 1 OR stack ORS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in parallel 1 Push stack PSHS Stores the operated result up to this instruction 1 Read stack RDS Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 1 Pop stack POPS Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS 1 instruction Leading DF Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading 1 edge F edge of the trigger is detected differential Trailing edge DF Turns on the contact for only one scan when the trailing 1 differential DF edge of the trigger is detected Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is show
154. act serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 14 52 Availability Name FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 gt FPO gt gt FP X 32 bit data compare AND AND gt FP e N A A A N A A gt FP3 gt FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH 32 bit data A A A compare AND AND lt gt N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare AND AND gt N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare AND AND gt 32 bit data A A A compare AND AND lt N A N A N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare AND AND lt N A N A e A Available N A Not available 14 53 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 32 bit data compare OR ORD D 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 8151 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD lt gt D lt 81 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD gt ORD gt D gt 51 52 D gt 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact i
155. action P F28 32 bit data D 81 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 11 P28 subtraction PD F30 16 bit data S1 S2 D S1 X S2 2 D 1 D 7 P30 multiplication P F31 32 bit data D 1 S2 D S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 11 P31 multiplication PD F32 16 bit data 1 S2 D 81 S2 quotient D 7 P32 division P remainder DT9015 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or DT90015 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP10SH F33 32 bit data D 1 S2 D S1 1 1 S241 S2 5quotient D 1 D 11 P33 division PD remainder DT9016 DT9015 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or DT90016 DT90015 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP10SH F34 16 bit data W 1 S2 D S1 X S2 5 D 7 P34 multiplication P W result in 16 bits F35 16 bit data 1 D D 1 D 3 P35 increment P 1 F36 32 bit data D 1 D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D 3 P36 increment PD 1 14 66 Availability R FP4 e FP M Note Name 3 E g xi S C14 C24 C56 646 C20 2 N N L2 L2 16 C40 C72 C32 u u u u F23 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P23 F25 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P25 F26 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P26 F27 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P27 F28 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P28 F30 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P30 F31 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P31 F32 A A A A A A A A A A A A A P32 F33 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P33 F34 N A A A N A NA N A N A N A NA N A A A A P34 F35 A A A
156. al and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number A il Example Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 6 4 Each digit is converted to a binary number Y Y Y BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 8 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment display with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below BCD arithmetic instructions F40 B to F58 DB 1 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 to F38 D 1 as operation in the PLC takes place in binary Input From a Digital Switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 BIN Digital eT olla 8 7 3 switch l EX mone peoa CELLE PLC 4 Conversion using Data which b BIN Pe BIN BEAN apie BIN data onverted to 1992 in decimal data Precautions During Programming FPO 8 2 Handling BCD Data Output to a 7 segment Display with Decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 BCD Bie BIN ae zs BIN pus EE EE e Bcp F80 BCD instruction REN Data outed fom oo o T o TT 7 segment 7 1 9 9 2 display l g g C
157. al block socket made by Phoenix Contact Co product number 1840434 section 7 6 3 Input connector 9 pin 2 Output connector 9 pin The input and output connectors and 8 use a connector made by Molex Japan Co product number 51067 0900 section 7 7 43 4 Expansion hook is used to secure expansion units The hook is also used for installation on FPO flat type mounting plate AFP0804 Expansion connector connects an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit section 6 1 45 DIN rail attachment lever allows simple attachment to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on FPO slim type mounting plate AFP0803 2 Input connector 10 pin 62 Output connector 10 pin Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 6 and 62 section 7 8 6 Input connectors 10 pin x 2 69 Output connectors 10 pin x 2 Use a MIL type connector for the input and output connectors 62 and 68 section 7 8 RS232C port Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port such as an a bar code reader or an image checker enabling data input and output section 7 9 Optional Memory FPO 2 1 Parts and Terminology 2 1 1 1 Status Indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error RUN green Illuminates when in the RUN mode and indicates the execution of a program It flashes during forced
158. al relay R 1 008 points RO to R62F 1 008 1 008 memory points RO points RO points to R62F to R62F Note 1 Special internal 64 points R9000 to R903F relay R Timer Counter 144 points initial setting is 100 timer points TO to T99 44 counter T C points C100 to C143 Note 2 Timer range 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s selected by instruction Data register 1 660 words DTO to DT1659 6 144 16 384 6 144 DT words words words DTO to DTO to DTO to DT6143 DT16383 DT6143 Note 1 Special data 112 words DT9000 to DT9111 112 words 112 words register DT DT90000 DT9000 to to DT90111 DT9111 Index register 2 words IX IY Differential points DF DF Unlimited of points Master control relay points MCR 32 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 64 labels 255 labels 64 labels 12 3 Specifications FPO 12 1 Performance Specifications Number of step ladders Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM C16CP 128 stages 704 stages Note 1 128 stages Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 sub routines 16 sub routines Number of interrupt programs 7 programs external 6 points internal 1 point 1 program internal 1 point Self diagnosis function Such as watchdog timer program syntax check Cloc
159. ally lit FP X FPO FP X LED ERROR ALARM Flashes contunually lit FP e Screen display ERR Continually lit E Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appopriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after swirching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of er
160. an and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one High level contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are E7 instruction Stops programmed using the same trigger AIA type error continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately High level There is an incorrect operand in an instruction instruction which requires a specific E8 operand Stops combination operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type combina Enter the correct combination of tion error operands No E9 program Stops Program may be damaged AIA Try to send the program again error When inputting with the programming Rewrite tool software a delection addition or during Conti change of order of an E10 RUN instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET AJAJAJA syntax nues SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a error rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available 14 125 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error n Name tion Description and steps to take a ee o 2 M status amp aja a jajajajaja E20 CPU error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality Alalala p Please contact your dealer RAM E21
161. approx 75 g 2 65 oz approx 105 g 3 70 oz approx 70 g 2 47 oz approx 85 g 3 00 oz Optional Memory FPO 2 2 2 2 1 2 Unit type FPO Control unit Specifications FPO C10 Control unit The current consumed by the control unit power supply connector If expansion units or intelligent units are added the current is increased by the value indicated below 100mA or less Current Consumed by the Control Unit Expansion unit The current consumed by the expansion unit power supply connector If a unit is not listed below it means that it has no power supply connector Input circuit The current consumed by the input circuits of the various units The value indicates the current that flows into the input circuit 25 8mA or less Output circuit The current consumed by the output circuits of the various units The value indicates the current used to drive the output circuit The value does not include the load current value FPO C14 100mA or less 34 4mA or less FPO C16 40mA or less 34 4mA or less 28mA or less 32 FPO T32 60mA or less 68 8mA or less 52mA or less S LINK Control unit FPO SL1 150mA or less FPO Expansion unit FPO E8X 10mA or less 34 4mA or less FPO E8R 15mA or less 50mA or less 17 2mA or less FPO E8YR 10mA or less 100mA or less FPO E8Y
162. argest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL 1 S2 D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 8 P282 16 bit data PSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1 S2 D The toutptu value Y is found for the input value X 10 P283 32 bit data PDSCAL by performing scaling for the given data table F284 Inclination RAMP S1 S2 S3 Executes the linear output for the specified time 10 P284 output of 16 D from the specified initial value to the target value bit data Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 S2 S3 When S1 gt S3 S1 gt D 10 P285 lower limit PLIMT D When 1 lt S3 S22D control When S1 or S3 lt or S2 99 20 16 bit data F286 Upper and DLIMT 81 82 S3 When S141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 8141 S1 16 P286 lower limit PDLIMT D D 1 D control When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 32 bit data D 1 D When S1 1 S1 or 8341 S3 or S2 1 52 5311 S3 5 D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND 81 82 99 When S1 gt S3 S3 S15D 10 P287 control PBAND D When 9299 99 92 20 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or 52 02D F288 Deadband DBAND 81 82 S8 When S141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 16 P288 control PDBAND D 1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S81 S3 S2 1 2 D 1 D When 5111 S1 lt or 5311 S3 or S241 2 0 D 1 D F289 Zone control ZONE 81 82 S3 When S3 0 S3 S15D
163. as been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree E5 Note Program area error Stops An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 14 124 Error Peta x Name tion Description and steps to take m ro code olmlxt o o status 2lelelg jose The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce Compile the total number of steps for the E6 memory Stops program full error FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every sc
164. at least 50 mm 1 97 in of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more wre ial CD E FPO ial 50 mm 1 97 in or more Maintain a minimum of 100 mm 3 937 in between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the FPO unit 100mm 3 937 in or more Other device or panel door FPO Keep the first 100 mm 3 937 in from the front surface of the FPO control unit open in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring Installation FPO 6 3 Attachment to DIN Rails 6 3 Attachment to DIN Rails The FPO unit enables one touch attachment to DIN rails Procedure 1 the upper hook of the FPO unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the FPO unit into position Mounting panel 1 DIN rail You can easily remove the FPO unit as described below Procedure 1 Inserta slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever Pull the attachment lever downwards Lift up the FPO unit and remove it from the rail FPO unit 3 M DIN rail A DIN rail attachment lever
165. ator LED The LED display the operation mode and error statuses 2 ERROR ADDRESS display 2 digit hexadecimal display The address at which the S LINK system error occurred is displayed 3 Mode switch The mode switch changes the operation mode 4 Transmission indicator SEND This flashes when input or output data is transmitted between the various units of the S LINK system ERROR indicators These light if an error occurs in the S LINK system ERR1 Error 1 Short circuit between D G line ERR2 Unused ERRS Error 3 Abnormal voltage level between D G line ERR4 Error 4 Broken wire or S LINK I O device error 6 System SET button Pressing the system SET button reads the connection status for the S LINK system and stores it in the memory In subsequent operation the S LINK unit checks for errors using the connection status registered at this time The output unit data effective at the time that the system SET button was pressed is retained w next page S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 1 Names and Functions 7 S LINK terminal block 6 pin The power supply and signal wires of the S LINK system are connected to the S LINK terminal block The S LINK terminal block can be detached from the FPO S LINK control unit for wiring operations For detailed information refer to section 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block Tool port RS232C The tool port RS232C is used to connect a programming tool 9 Power sup
166. atus of the status indicator LEDs on the FPO control unit vary as shown in the table X0 7 Flea 6 Status RUN E rm indicator m LEDs PROG om E 7 ROR o ME ALARM 5 RUN om 8 PROG 9 LED status Program Condition Description execution ON Normal operation in RUN Operation Normal RENS m Normal operation in PROG condition OFF ON mode Blink OFF Forcing ON OFF in RUN mode Operation OFF When a self diagnostic error Operation Abnormal OFF ON occurs condition When a system watchdog Varies Varies timer error occurs Stop Normally if an error occurs operation of FPO stops The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped if a duplicate output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the system registers with TOOL software 11 3 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function 11 1 1 Allowing Duplicated Output When you change system register 20 settings ENAB using the programming software duplicated output is not regarded as an error and the FPO continues to operate 11 1 2 Continuing After an Operation Error When you change system register 26 settings CONT
167. ays off relay Always off R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan 14 15 FPO Address Name Description E Turns on only at the first scan in the operation R3013 pulse relay Turns off from the second scan and maintains the off state x Turns off only at the first scan in the operation R9014 Initial off pulse relay Turns on from the second scan andmaintains the on state Step ladder initial on Turns on for an instant only in the first scan of the process R9015 A pulse relay the moment step ladder process is opened R9016 R9017 Not used 0 01 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 01 s R9018 l e relay cycles 001 0 02 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s R9019 ej relay cycles 0028 Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay eus R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles o2s S Repeats on off operations in 1 s R901C 1 s clock pulse relay yoles ZEE Repeats on off operations in 2 s R901D 2 s clock pulse relay cycles ut 1 min clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 min R901E ic relay cycles nmn R901F Not used Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG R3920 RUN mode flag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9021 to R9025 Not used R9026 Tone Note Message flag Turns on while the
168. cally added to the data being transmitted and the data is sent For details see F144 TRNS instruction The data register to be used as the transmission table is specified using the F144 TRNS instruction Data transmission is executed using the F144 TRNS instruction There is no restriction on the number of bytes that can be transmitted Any number of bytes may be sent as long as it does not exceed the range that can be used by the data register Table for transmission Transmission Transmitted data storage area External device PC etc General use Serial Communications FPO 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 3 Data Reception Data sent from an external device is received at the RS232C port The received data is automatically stored in the data register specified as the reception buffer For details see F144 TRNS instruction Data registers used as reception buffers are specified by system register 417 and 418 Data reception is enabled by the F144 TRNS instruction Reception buffer Reception Received data storage area External device bar code reader etc 10 4 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 2 System Registe
169. can be detected more easily if I O devices closer to the S LINK control unit are given smaller addresses and addresses increase in sequential order for I O devices which are farther away from the S LINK control unit S LINK Numeric values indicate the initial address for each I O control unit 10 20 30 40 device 80 170 60 50 Up to two I O devices can be assigned the same address within the system for any individual S LINK control unit Do not set the same address for three or more I O devices Up to seven boosters can be connected to one system for any individual S LINK control unit but the actual number which can be connected varies depending on the units configuring the system and the wiring length x Note The FPO S LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring function 4 12 FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators 4 7 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators If an error occurs in the S LINK system the ERROR indicator indicated in the table below lights depending on the content of the error ERROR indicators Description Steps to take ERR1 ERR2 ERR3 ERR4 Short circuit between D G If the ERR1 or ERR indicator lights output of note 1 the signal being transmitted stops and none of the S LINK devices connected to the sys
170. combinations 1 phase x 2 channels and 2 phases x 1 channel are also possible for the high speed counter 6 The internal relay data register and timer counter hold areas of the T32CT control unit 10 k step type can be changed by the system registers The number of points in the table is the value when the System registers are initial values 7 The max counting speed 10kHz is the counting speed with a rated input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of 25 C The counting speed frequency will decrease depending on the voltage and temperature 8 If both reset inputs XO and X1 are reset X2 will be the reset input of X1 In the same way for X3 and X4 X5 acts as the reset input of X4 9 With a CPU of Ver 1 2 or a subsequent version the frequency will be 0 15Hz to 1kHz 10 The maximum is 9 5kHz when the positioning control instruction F168 is executed Precautions when using the battery backup function Secondary chargeable battery is used as backup battery in the FPO T32C control unit The battery is not charged before the unit is shipped So please make sure that the built in backup battery have been charged before using the unit 12 The program system resisters and the hold type areas internal relay data register and counter are backed up by the built in EEPROM 13 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 100 000 or less 14 The possible number of write times by the EEP
171. contact serially by 5 psmES comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 AN lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by 5 lt 81 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition m 81 62 AN lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by 5 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition lt 51 52 S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 14 46 Availability Name FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 gt FPO gt gt FP X 16 bit data compare AND AN gt FP e N A A A N A A gt FP3 gt FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH 16 bit data A A A compare AND AN lt gt N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare AND AN gt N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare AND AN gt 16 bit data A A A compare AND AN lt N A N A N A N A 16 bit data A A A compare AND AN lt N A N A e A Available N A Not available 14 47 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 16 bit data OR Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by 5 compare 7 80 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition OR S1 S2 OR lt gt
172. cted as well Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 7 E8X X21 COM COM Note 1 Ime Notes e The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 48 E16X E16X X20 X21 ra X28 X29 9 O wale Una I mof rufen COM A Li COM 00000000 me Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Eith
173. d 24N DC The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 17 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 1 E8RS E8RM E8RS E8RM O O X0 3 X0 3 5 oe uan ke Li B a O O e E X23 a O 3c ac 40 im 40 5r t3 55 z l COM a le e oc a a ay Y0 3 B Y20 Yo 3 bo TT dk z E css Y23 er us yet ec E 60 aga Load 8 5 Load e COM Load e Load e Power supply Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 3 18 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 2 E16RS E16RM Load Load Load Load oa oa oa IPERE supply X20 X27 COM Y20 Y27 COM 3 4 000000 Pin Layouts e Either positive or negative polarit
174. d Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR Boolean mode FP Programmer II Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simulta neously with the change In the case of FP Programmer the mode must be changed See section 8 7 4 Operation of each instruction If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the re write will be held If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on status To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the re write will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instruc tions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT in structions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change In the case of FP Programmer II set values can be rewritten during operation without affecting the timer For detailed information we section 8 8 High level instructions If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the re write wil
175. d Output 8 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of Internal and Output Relays During Operation When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation AY il Example Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This section of the program is gt processed as if RO were on This section of the program is processed as if RO were off This section of the program is processed as if RO were on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer instructions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the results of the operation at the greatest program address A MW Example Output to the same output relay YO with OT SET and RST instructions YO YO on YO s YO on x2 YO HR YO off When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 IORF FPO Precautions During Programming 8 2 Handling BCD Data 8 2 Handling BCD Data 8 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decim
176. d counter and Pulse output 5 counter and controls according to the control code specified by Pulse output S The control code is stored in DT9052 controls F1 Change and DMV S DT9044 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and 7 read of the Pulse output elapsed value area DT9045 elapsed value DT9044 of high speed DT9044 D Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse 7 counter and output elapsed value area DT9045 DT9044 to Pulse output D 1 D F162 High speed HCOS S Yn The specified external output relay Yn turns on 7 counter output when the elapsed value of the high speed counter set agrees with the specified target value S 1 S F163 High speed HCOR S Yn The specified external output relay Yn turns off 7 counter output when the elapsed value of the high speed counter reset agrees with the specified target value S 1 S F164 Speed control SPDO S Controls conditions of outputs according to the 3 Pulse output elapsed value of the high speed counter Two and pattern types of output control available output con Pulse output control trols See Pattern output control below F165 Cam control CAMO S Controls cam operation on off patterns of each 3 cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter Pulse output specifications for FP M FP1 Item FP1 C14 C16 FP M C16T FP1 C24 C40 FP1 C56 C72 FP M C20T C20R C32T Pulse output terminal Y7 Y7 Y6 and Y7 selectable P
177. d data S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address 32 bit relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum MIN S1 S2 D Searches for the minimum value in the word data 8 P272 value word PMIN table between the area selected with S1 and S2 data 16 bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum DMIN S1 S2 D Searches for the minimum value in the double word 8 P273 value double PDMIN data table between the area selected with S1 and word data S2 and stores it in the D The address relative 32 bit to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and MEAN S1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the word 8 P275 mean values PMEAN data with sign from the area selected with S1 to word data S2 are obtained and stored in the D 16 bit F276 Total and DMEAN S1 S2 D The total value and the mean value of the double 8 P276 mean values PDMEAN word data with sign from the area selected with double word data 32 bit S1 to S2 are obtained and stored in the D 14 102 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 Name 5 E 2 o ang Xe g C14 C24 c56 C20 x e E E t amp C16 cao C72 c32 amp amp amp e F262 NA A A N A NIA NA NA NA NA NA A A A P262 F263
178. d in bits O to 3 Auxiliary register for DT90014 operation DT9014 DT90015 DT9015 Auxiliary register for operation DT90016 DT9016 Operation error DT90017 address hold DT9017 One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when F105 BSR or F106 BSL instruction is executed The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT9015 DT90015 when F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT9015 and DT9016 DT90015 and DT90016 when F33 D or F53 DB instruction is executed After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display Operation error DT90018 address non hold DT9018 The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous address At the beginning of scan the address is 0 Monitor the address using decimal display DT90019 DT9019 2 5 ms ring counter The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points 14 18 Address FPO C10 FPO T32 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Name Descriptions DT9020 Availabl e type SL1 S LINK status flag error flag 15 543210 DT9020 Not used
179. d that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported 143 Multiple frames A different command was received when processing multiple procedure error frames i A route number that does not exist was spacified Verify the 150 Link setting error MM route number by designating the transmission station 151 Transmission Transmission to anather device not possible because time out error transmissition buffer is congested 152 Transmit disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple 153 Busy error frame processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 60 Parameter error Content of spacified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number 61 Data error BEER desigination size designation range or format designation 162 Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration 163 PC mode sm PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN mode 14 134 Error sade Name Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity External memory 64 eof Write e
180. d types and non hold type settings System registers 6 to 8 and 14 With the FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 the areas held in the event of a power supply interruption are fixed at the areas shown in the table below and the settings for system registers 6 to 8 and 14 will be invalid C10 C14 C16 Timer Non hold type All points Non hold type From the set value to C139 Counter Hold type 4 points elapsed values C140 to C143 976 points RO to R60F 61 words WRO to WR60 32 points R610 to R62F 2 words WR61 to WR62 Non hold type 1652 words DTO to DT1651 Hold type 8 words DT1652 to DT1659 Non hold type Internal relay Hold type Data register C32 SL1 Timer Non hold type All points Non hold type From the set value to C127 Counter Hold type 16 points elapsed values C128 to C143 880 points RO to R54F 55 words WRO to WR54 128 points R550 to R62F 8 words WR55 to WR62 Data register Non hold type 6112 words DTO to DT6111 Hold type 32 words DT6112 to DT6143 Non hold type Internal relay Hold type With the FPO T32 set each relay and register to a hold type or non hold type Non hold Set value n type Hold type size increases Set value gt n Set value n Hold type Non hold type size increases For normal situations set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a n
181. data A A A compare Start STD gt N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare Start STD gt 32 bit data A A A compare Start STD lt N A N A N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare Start STD lt N A N A e A Available N A Not available 14 51 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 32 bit data compare AND AND D 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 AND lt gt D lt gt 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt AND gt D gt 51 52 D gt S1 52 ele aie Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 AND lt D lt S1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt D lt 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open cont
182. data when starting operation you can also write the data to EEPROM by using the F12 EEPROM read instruction and the F13 EEPROM write instruction If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is being executed data may not be written in the EEPROM properly Also the area where the internal relays data registers and timer counter are held may not be held properly Do not turn off the power supply while the P13 instruction is being executed 2 28 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 Expansion I O Units Parts and 3 3 3 1 1 Expansion I O Unit Types 3 4 Specifications ba FE E 3 6 3 2 1 General Specifications 3 6 3 2 2 Input Specifications ll 3 6 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points 3 7 3 2 3 Output Specifications 3 8 3 2 3 1 Relay Output Type 3 8 3 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type 3 9 Internal Circuit 8 3 10 3 8 1 X Relay Output Type E8RS E8RM E16RS E16RM 3 10 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type 3 11 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type 3 11 3 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type ET6P E32P x elei 3 13 3 8 8 Expansion Input Units EBX E16X 3 14 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 3 15 3 3 4 1 NPN Open Collector Type ESYT ETOYXT 3 15 3 3 4 2 PNP Ope
183. der is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input When the high speed counter is being used in the incremental input mode even if input is specified as an interrupt input and as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and input XO functions as counter input for the high speed counter No 400 H1 a This setting will be valid No 402 H1 No 403 H1 14 11 FPO Item Ado Name LOS Descriptions ress value Unit No setting for tool 1 410 port when connecting C 1 to 32 K1 to K32 K1 NET Using FPWIN GR Modem Disable Enable Data length 7 bits 8 bits Using FP programmer II Specify the setting contents using H constants 15 6 0 Modem Disabled Tool 411 Communication format Data t port setting for tool port length Modem communication setting 8 bits 0 Disabled HO 1 Enabled Data lenght character bits 0 8 bits 1 7 bits When connecting a modem set the unit number to 1 with system register 410 Setting by 414 Baud rate program 9600 0 9600 bps setting ming tool HO 1 19200 bps software oj j p RS232C port Tool port HO 19200 bps Tool aoa bps H1 9600 bps port Baud rate Setting by H1 19200 bps H2 4800 bps RS232C 414 setting for FP pro H1 If anything other than HOX H3 2400 bps tool port and grammer or H1 is set for the tool H4 1200 bps port RS232C port II port baud rate the baud H5 600 bps setting rate will be 9600 bps H
184. differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 S LINK Control Unit Names and Functions 2 220020 0 cee 4 3 Specifications 25 odes crac due vbi edes 4 5 4 21 General Specifications 4 5 4 22 S LINK Controller Specifications 4 6 Wiring 6 5 4 7 4 8 14 Wiring to Power Supply Connector 4 7 4 9 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block 4 7 Sequence of Turning on Power Supplies 4 9 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On 4 10 S LINK System Address Recognition 4 11 4 6 1 Recognizing the Address 4 11 4 6 2 Address Setting of S LINK I O Device 4 12 Judging Errors from the Error Indicators 4 13 Judging Errors Address Displays 4 14 S LINK Control Unit FPO FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 1 Names and Functions 4 1 Names and Functions B oN sp o 7 fo E Lo TE D o ALARM d 9 4 0 8 PROG SET t1 Ors Li 24V ra O ov n D a 7 B D 9 24V n O Inl 5 ENE 550 M Wwe e O 0 Status indic
185. dition S1 lt S2 ST lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in 5 H lt 51 S2 the comparative condition S1 S2 or S1 S2 14 44 Name Availability FP X FP e FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 FP3 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Data compar e instructions 16 bit data compare Start ST A A gt N A N A gt gt 16 bit data compare Start ST lt gt N A N A 16 bit data compare Start ST gt 16 bit data compare Start ST gt N A N A N A N A 16 bit data compare Start ST lt N A N A 16 bit data compare Start ST lt N A N A A Available N A Not available 14 45 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps 16 bit data AN Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by 5 compare 51 52 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition AND m ST S2 AN lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by 5 lt gt 81 82 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition E 1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 AN gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by 5 gt 81 52 comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition un S1582 AN gt Connects a Form A normally open
186. e common Molex connector FPO E16RM AFP03313 FPO E16 Input 8 24V DC Transister MIL connector FPO E16T AFP03343 Expansion Output 8 Sink Sourse NPN 0 1 A Unit t teommon Transister o FPO E16P AFP03353 PNP 0 1 A Output 16 Transister MIL connector FPO E16YT AFP03340 NPN 0 1 A Transister o FPO E16YP AFP03350 PNP 0 1 A Input 16 24 V DC Transister o MIL connector FPO E32T AFP03543 FPO E32 Output 16 Sink Sourse NPN 0 1 A ji common Tied Transister otuput FPO E32P AFP03553 PNP 0 1A 1 The control units and relay output type expansion units come with a power cable part number AFPO581 The transistor output type expansion units need no power cable 2 The terminal block type relay output units have 2 terminal blocks 9 pins made by Phoenix Use a 2 5 mm 098 inch wide screwdriver Preferably use the specific terminal block screwdriver part number AFP0806 Phoenix type code SZSO 4 2 5 mm 098 inch or equivalent 3 The connector type relay output units have 2 connectors made by Nihon Molex Molex type code 51067 0900 9 pins Use the specific Molex connector press fit tool part number AFP0805 Nihon Molex type code 57189 5000 or equivalent 4 The transistor output units have a press fit socket for wire pressed terminal cable and contacts Use the press fit tool part number AXY52000 for wire press
187. e contacts RCC Specifies a range in word units WC Turns contacts on and off WCS Specifies only one point Mite contackared WCP Specifies multiple contacts WCC Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write data area WD Writes data to a data area Read timer counter set value area RS Reads the value set for a timer counter Write timer counter set value area WS Writes a timer counter setting value Read timer counter ellapsed value area RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area WK Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored MC Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored MD Registers the data to be monitored Aris Monitors a registered contact or data using the Monitoring start MG code MC or MD Embeds th f ified in a 16 Preset contact area fill command SC m point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register WR Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort AB Aborts communication 14 136 1
188. ecommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily The driver IC for the RS232C is in full conformance with EIA TIA 232E and CCITT V 28 standards 5 The combinations 1 phase x 2 channels and 2 phases x 1 channel are also possible for the high speed counter 6 The internal relay data register and timer counter hold areas of the T32CT control unit 10 k step type can be changed by the system registers The number of points in the table is the value when the system registers are initial values 7 The max counting speed 10kHz is the counting speed with a rated input voltage of 24V DC and an ambient temperature of 25 C The counting speed frequency will decrease depending on the voltage and temperature 8 If both reset inputs X0 and X1 are reset X2 will be the reset input of X1 In the same way for X3 and X4 X5 acts as the reset input of X4 9 With a CPU of Ver 1 2 or a subsequent version the frequency will be 0 15Hz to 1kHz 10 The maximum is 9 5kHz when the positioning control instruction F168 is executed 11 Precautions when using the battery backup function Secondary chargeable battery is used as backup battery in the FPO T32C control unit The battery is not charged before the unit is shipped so please make sure that the buil
189. ector type 5 to 24 V DC Note PNP open collector type 24 V DC Operating load voltage range NPN open collector type 4 75 to 26 4 V DC PNP open collector type 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Max load current 0 1A Max surge current 0 3A Output points per common E16T E16P 8 points common E32T E32P E16YT E16YP 16 points common OFF state leakage current 100 uA or less ON state voltage drop 1 5 Vor less External power Voltage supply for 21 6 to 26 4 V DC driving internal Current circuit YO and Y1 5 mA 1 point except YO and Y1 3 mA 1 point Response time OFF ON 1 ms or less YO and Y1 only 50 us or less ON OFF 1 ms or less YO and Y1 only 50 us or less Surge absorber Operating mode indicator Zener diode For NPN open collector type able to be used with different voltages for the load voltage and the external power supply for driving the internal circuit Internal oo circuit External power supply for driving internal circuit u 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated load voltage 5 V to 24 V DC Load Ground for load voltage and Sr for external power supply for o o f x 2 driving internal circuit Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 1 Relay Ou
190. ed enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises 11 Number of temperature input averaging process settings System register 409 The number of averaging times can be set in order to even out the variation in the input thermocouple values For normal use it set the number of times to t least twenty For default value 0 the number of average processing times is 20 12 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode 14 3 Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool p
191. ed terminal cable FPO Overview 1 4 Components 1 1 9 Intelligent Units Product name FPO Ther K J T R thermocouple Resolution 0 1 C FPO TC4 AFP0420 K J T R thermocouple Resolution 0 1 C 8 AFP0421 FP Web Unit for connecting FP series RS232C interface and Ethernet FP WEB AFP0610 Server unit Web Server function and E mail sending function Specifications Product No Input specifications Number or channels 2 channels FP0 A21 AFP0480 Input range Oto 5 V 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 FPO Analog 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 VO unit Output specifications Number or channel 1 channels Output range 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO A D Input specifications Number or channe 8 channels FP0 A80 AFP0401 Converter Input range Oto 5 V 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 Unit 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO D A Output specifications Number or channel 4 channels FPO A04V AFP04121 Converter Output range 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 Unit 4 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO A04I AFP04123 1 1 4 Link Units Power supply Product voltage Faruno No This unit is for making the FPO function as a slave station of the CC Link FPO CCLS AFP07943 Only one unit can be connected to the furthest right edge of the FPO expansion bus Note Accuracy will change if an FPO thermocouple unit is used at the same time
192. eed counter stopping the pulse outputs and setting and resetting the near home input Specify this instruction together with the FO MV instruction and the special data register DT9052 DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Clear controls stopping the pulse outputs from high speed counter instructions F166 to F170 Near home processing for home return operations High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function A S il Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration x3 H pF Fo Mv H 4 DT9052 Fo MV H 0 DT9052 psa In the above program the near home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations A il Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output X7 H DF Fo Mv H 8 DT9052 FO MV H 0 DT9052 Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built in high speed counter Specify this instruction together with the F1 DMV instruction and the special data register DT9044 DT90044 The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed val
193. er pack Attaches to FPO various units Additional part Length 1 m 3 281 ft AFP0581 1 socket per pack Molex socket Wire press socket FPO Power cable FPO Overview 1 2 Expansion Possibilities 1 2 Expansion Possibilities Be sure to check that the units are added according to the following restrictions e A maximum of three expansion I O units or analog I O units can be connected to one control unit e There are no restrictions on the combinations of the kind control units and expansion units e A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible e The expansion unit can be attached directly to the control unit easily Special expansion cables backplanes and so forth are unnecessary as the expansion unit employs a stacking system that uses expansion connector and expansion hooks on the surface of the unit itself EL z E 2 E N un RUN fT del an act set Ol 218 AR H 2498 3 5 4 5 n 4 ao 4 C ao 5 5 s 8 i B H Ms 3 ie E ta 5 KE RUN BO a3 Bel BO Al al a oe oe
194. er positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit The input numbers for the expansion input units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 9 E8YT E8YT Output e Load Load e Y20 z e Load Load e i Y21 e Load Load e Load Load e B J gt 3 4 10 E8YP E8YP Output z 9 20 e e 8 1 8 4 6 x Note The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit The output numbers for the expansion output units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 11 E16YT Output Output Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load eS Notes Y20 Y21 3 4 Pin Layouts dolgtiooo oookokoo
195. ered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET or RST instruction or high level instruction for data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists under normal conditions it will be flagged as an error the ERROR ALARM LED will light and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to Check for Duplicated Use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using FP Programmer II Operate the TOTAL CHECK function Key operation L esr 53 If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUP USE and the address will be displayed Using FPWIN GR software Execute the Debug on Totally Check Program If there are any duplicated outputs an error message DUPLICATED OUTPUT ERROR and the address will be displayed If you execute SEARCH AN ERROR the error message will be displayed and the first address number will be displayed Enabling Duplicated Output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable when using FP Programmer II set K1 When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed Precautions During Programming FPO 8 14 Use of Duplicate
196. error occurred is displayed as a hexadecimal value oO SDO RUN ERROR ADDRESS Egg AE WIES I ADDRESS ia 9 display P DDOUBBNGE ERROR indicator e o During normal transmission The 5 2 shaped charactor rotates in the clockwise direction 39 ue cc Inn If an error occurs The address is displayed In case faults occur at several locations the smallest error address is displayed and the decimal points light up simultaneously S LINK control unit 10 1201 130 40 44 Bex x f 80 70 60 50 Broken wire Decimal points light up lt Multiple broken wires gt 32 hexadecimal 50 decimal 4 14 Chapter 5 Allocation 61 5 3 5 2 essa has aa eR dp EIE 5 4 5 3 Expansion O Unit ep ie ees He 5 5 I O Allocation FPO FPO I O Allocation 5 1 Number 5 1 I O Number Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Example External input rela
197. error1 E22 RAM error2 PRs RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal E23 Stops RAM error3 RAM Please contact your dealer es error4 RAM E25 error5 Master memory The models of master memories are A E25 model Stops different Use the master memories Noe unmatch created with the same model error FP e FPO FP X and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memor cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off E26 User s Stops Please contact your dealer Alala lalalalala ROM error C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contens are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the h z limitations i e 4 or more link units E27 IS alanag Stops gt Turn off the power and re configure AEA elon aaa DR units referring to the hardware manual System Probably an abnormality in t
198. et for Start and Terminal Codes 10 8 10 3 2 If Yes has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Code ETX 10 9 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 11 2 Self Diagnostic Function 0 cece teens 11 3 11 1 1 Allowing Duplicated Output 11 4 11 1 2 Continuing 11 4 Troubleshooting sad sua VOY er etd tus ee ua ds 11 5 11 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking 002 00 eee 11 5 11 2 2 EHROR ALARM LED is ON cere er shed Opes ae 11 7 1123 AIIEEDsare ORR eet a edie tg Beata LER Ies 11 7 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction 0 eee 11 8 11 2 5 PROTECT ERROR is 11 10 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 10 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 Performance Specifications 000 cece eee teen eens 12 3 VO Allocation Tables 5 cun tace ea RU E ER ne X sees E 12 8 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 11 FPO SL1 S LINK Address code saber tbt dae rox e dgio es 12 13 Specification Power Supply Unit I O Link Unit 12 14 12 5 1 FPO Power Supply Unit AFPO634 12 14 1205 27 FPO NVO Lin knit se n dre has a ted Behe cn ene etie e i
199. et value area SV After the change it will no longer be effective When a set value in the program is specified by a set value area number In the case of a non hold type timer or counter 0 is preset in the set value area SV In the case of a hold type timer or counter the value changed by the method on the following page is preset in the set value area SV Precautions During Programming FPO 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN Method 1 Method using the programming tool software Procedure Select Monitoring Registers from the Online menu Explanation of each column 1 Displays the line number 2 Displays the device code and device number 3 Displays the monitored data During online monitoring you can make changes to the data by either pressing Enter in this column or by double clicking 4 Displays the base decimal hexadecimal binary or ASCII and the number of words 5 Displays the I O comment for each register You can input I O comments for each register by either pressing Enter in this column or by double clicking Click in each column and change the settings For details please refer to the GR help menu The FPWIN GR tool software has a similar menu For information on operating the menus please check the Help menu FPO Precautions During Programming 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN Method 2 Method using the FP P
200. etting instructions Communica SYS1 Change the communication conditions for the COM port or 13 tion condi tool port based on the contents specified by the character tions setting constant Password Change the password specified by the PLC based on the setting contents specified by the character constant Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by setting the character constant PLC link Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based time setting H on the contents specified by the character constant MEWTOCOL Change the communication conditions of the COM port or COM tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents response specified by the character constant control High speed Change the operation mode of the high speed counter counter based on the contents specified by the character constant operation mode changing System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC 7 registers link function No 40 to H Hsvs2 s oH No 47 changing 14 42 Availability FP M x Name 2 5 N x 2 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 2 S N 16 C40 C72 C32 Special setting instructions Communica N A A A N A NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A tion condi tions setting Password N A A A N A NA N A NIA N A N A N A N A N A N A setting Mii Interrupt N A A
201. etting of CH3 takes precedence Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 14 10 FPO Item pud Name Pap Descriptions ress value XO X1 X2 X3 X4 x5 The checked contacts are set as pulse catch input In FP Programmer enter the above settings in hexadecimal Example 402 Pulse catch input Not set When X3 and X4 are set as pulse function settings HO catch input 19 0 noaz lololol XoXAX3X2X1X0 Furia H1 H8 y Input H18 With the FPO settings X6 and X7 are invalid Using FPWIN GR XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Input Expo p setting The checked contacts are set as interrupt input XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Specify the effective interrupt edge When set ON OFF is valid Using FP Programmer II Not set Example 403 Interrupt input settings When setting inputs X1 X2 and HO H0 X3 as interrupts and X0 and X1 are set as interrupt inputs when going from on to off Specify Specify edge interrupt r 15 0 X5X4X3X2X1X0 X5X4X3X2X1X0 HO H3 HO HF Input H30F Note1 With the TOOL software 0 or 1 is set for each bit on the screen in the setting for system register 403 Note2 If system register 400 to 403 are set simultaneously for the same inptu relay the following precedence or
202. executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 24 bit data of the high speed DT90046 DT9046 counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here High speed counter Target values have been preset for the various target value for ch0 instructions to be used when the high speed DT90047 DT9047 counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset values can only be read and cannot be written The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high DT90048 DT9048 speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the High speed counter i E elapsed valus area for high speed counter is automatically transferred Ep to the special registers DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 The value can be written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 24 bit data of the high speed DT90050 DT9050 counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here High speed counter F Target values have been preset for the various target value area for i ch1 instructions to be used when the high speed DT90051 DT9051 counter related instruction F166 to F170 is executed These preset values can only be read and cannot be written 14 22 Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Name Descriptions DT90052 DT9052 High speed counter control flag A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset
203. f can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 and F167 When using CHO with incremental input and reset input Count input Xo Reset input x2 x On and off output Yn gt The output turned on and off when values match can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired When using CHO with 2 phase input and reset input A phase input B phase input xi Reset input x2 x On and off output Yn The output turned on and off when values match can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired 9 11 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable Specify this instruction together with the FO MV instruction and the special data register DT9052 DT90052 Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset Count enable disable Hardware reset enable disable Clear controls from high speed counter instructions F166 to F170 Clear target value match interrupt AY il Example Performing a software reset X7 HDF FO MV H 1 DT9052 Fo MV H 0 DT9052 In the above program the reset is performed in
204. for 5 V circuit J oe Ld L4 Internal L Ye Load for5 V e circuit I l e Lv Eo ZN A e e e e LI Internal ZT up 5 2 Load for 24 V 24VDC circuit J w B5VDC External ze ZS ww Rated load ww power supply 1 voltage for driving e o gt e internal circuit Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 12 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type E16P E32P FPO E16P E32P Input side 5 6 kQ e X20 ET ees HERES e Internal d La L 1ko circuit Ff e 5 6 e d Aen Q 9 T pen F Internal 1 EL 1 il a 24VD circuit tke T J Note EE COM Output side Y det ae A 20 Internal e e Load circuit Y is i T 9 9 AM 1 Pc Y2n Internally 7 e Load 9 circuit zd n 24V DC 9 9 x Notes e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e Thel O number given above is the I O number when the expansio
205. for the duplicated use of output or the program flow when a control in struction such as MC or JP is used Check the settings of the I O allocation 11 9 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed When a password is set for the programmable controller lt Procedure gt Enter a password in the password setting menu in the FPWIN GR software and se lect enable 1 In the menu select Tool T and then Set PLC Password P 2 The PLC password setting dialog box appears shown below Select the Access radio button enter the password and then click the Settings button Set PLG Password Untitle2 PLE Home Operation Mode Close 5 Access Force Cancel C Protect C Unprotect Hep m Password Enter in hex 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN lt Condition gt A syntax error has occurred lt Procedure gt Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Refer to your software manual for details about the total check method 11 10 Chapter 12 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 Specifications Performance 6 5 12 3 VO Allocation Table ds be Be bade 12 7 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 10 FPO SL1 5 855 12 12 Spec
206. g 400 High speed counter mode settings X0 to X2 Setting by FP pro grammer ll HO CHO CH1 ol Tol 0 Do not use high speed counter 1 2 phase input X0 X1 2 2 phase input X1 Reset input X2 3 Incremental input X0 4 Incremental input X0 Reset input X2 5 Decremental input X0 6 Decremental input Reset input X2 7 Individual input XO X1 8 Individual input XO X1 Reset input X2 9 Direction decision X1 A Direction decision X0 X1 Reset input X2 0 Do not use high speed counter 3 Incremental input X1 4 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 5 Decremental input X1 6 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 Note1 If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH1 is invalid Note2 If reset input settings overlap the setting of CH1 takes precedence Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 14 9 FPO Item Add ress Name Default value Descriptions Input setting 401 High speed counter mode settings X3 to X5 Setting by progra mming tool soft ware Do not set X3 as high speed counter CH2 Do not se
207. g the MOLEX Connector Type 2 Place the contact in the crimping tool place the wire in the contact and lightly squeeze the tool 3 Insert the crimped wire into the housing until it contacts the back side Housing When removing a wire use a flat head screwdriver or other similar tool to pull up the hold down pin of the housing and then pull out the wire Screwdriver H Pull up Hold down pin Pull out Wire 7 17 Wiring FPO 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type 7 8 Wiring the MIL Connector Type The housings semi cover and pressure welders listed below come supplied with the FPO Use the wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Supplied connector Type Order number C16 E16 C32 E32 C16 C32 Housing 10 pin type only 4 pieces E16 E32 Semi cover AXW61001 4 pieces Welder contact AXW7221 5 pin x 8 Note The AXW7221 is for the AWG 22 and 24 If the AWG 26 or 28 is used please purchase the AXW7231 for the AWG 26 and 28 separately Suitable wires twisted wire Size Conductor cross sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current AWG 22 0 3 mm A AWG 24 0 2 mm dia 1 5 to dia 1 1 3 Pressure connection tool Order number AXY52000 Procedure The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor 1 Bendthe welder contact back from the carrier and
208. gins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 point type F S182 _ the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 952 real number HE data compare Start STF lt gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 81 82 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 952 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 STF gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 Lem 51 52 5 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 952 STF gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 P s1824 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or H S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 STF lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 pgs 51 52 4 the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 STF lt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in 9 F lt 51 82 ale the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or 1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 14 56 Name Availability FPO Ww 0 P X 6 FP1 FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 FP3 FP2SH 10SH FP Floating point type real number data compare Start STF N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Partly N A Note1 Floating point type real number data compare
209. gram syntax check Clock calender function Not available Available Not Note 3 available Special Pulse catch input Total 6 points Not functions to X1 50us available Interrupt input 39 to X5 100us RS232C port Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200bit s Note 4 Transmission distance 3m 9 84ft Only units with an RS232C Terminal block 3 pin made by phoenix Contact Co ort products number MKDS1 3 3 5 p Communication method Half duplex Periodical interrupt 0 5ms to 30s interval Constant scan Available Password Available High speed counter Counter mode Not TA Addition subtraction one phase Note 7 available Input point number Four channels maximum Maximum counting speed 10kHz maximum for all 4 channels Input contacts used count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 1 X4 count input ch 3 L X2 reset input Note 8 L X5 reset input Note 8 Minimum input pulse width 50us lt 10kHz gt 100us lt 5kHz gt Counter mode Not available Two phase individual direction decision two phase Input point number Two channels maximum Maximum counting speed 2kHz maximum for all 2 channels Input contacts used X0 count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 0 X4 count input ch 2 L X2 reset input L X5 reset input Minimum input pulse width 50us lt 10kHz gt 1
210. hapter 10 General use Serial Communications 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 3 10 1 1 General use Serial Communications 10 3 10 1 2 Data Transmission esee 10 3 10 1 3 Data Reception 10 4 10 2 System Register Settings lilius 10 5 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication sees 10 8 10 3 1 f None is Set for Start and Terminal COdeS 2 E EMI MEE 10 8 10 8 2 f Yes has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Code ETX Les ces eh E cetus obse tae 10 9 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 2 FPO General use Serial Communications 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 General use Serial Communications Function 10 1 1 General use Serial Communications Using the RS232C port data and commands can be sent to and received from an external device such as a bar code reader This is done by executing the F144 TRNS instruction Transmission and reception are not enabled in the default settings so system register 412 must be changed to a general use port K2 The transmission speed baud rate and transmission format are set using system register 413 and 414 10 1 2 Data Transmission Any desired data register can be prepared as the transmission table and the data stored in that table transmitted Start and terminal codes are automati
211. he operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The transfer data screen Communication Setting will open Select Condition to open ED por zi Cancel Communication Setting screen Baud rate 115200 v bps Initialize Change the value for Timeout Click button to complete the change of setting It will be set as the following value automatically Data Lenath 8 Stop Bit 1 C Even Time out 5 y sec Parameter for automatic setting v Baud rate r Parity FPO Precautions During Programming 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN Instructions which do not allow rewriting during RUN Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE Subroutine instructions SUB RET Interrupt instructions INT IRET Control instructions ED LBL LBL instructions allow insertion and writing but not deletion and clearing Instructions which do not allow rewriting to subprograms The following instructions do not allow rewriting during subroutines or interrupt programs Jump label instructions JP LBL Loop label instructions LOOP LBL Master control relay master control relay end instructions MC MCE Cases where rewriting is not pos
212. he dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged Writing is disabled There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt Install an memory card that has the program proterly recorded and execute the read once again E40 O error Sele ctable Abnormal I O unit FP FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro error in the status display function MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10S H DT90002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using System register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error in the status display function 14 128 A Available Error code
213. he system register E28 Aadi Stops Check the system register setting or 5 A initialize the system registers Note1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available 14 126 Error hora x Name tion Description and steps to take fic Io code ola x t oo status alala a jajajajaja fe peje sole Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the E29 Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set AJA parameter a correct parameter error Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality E30 error 0 Stops Please contact your dealer A An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem Interrupt int t t Aard b E31 Stops or error due to noise is possible AJAJAJA AJAJAJAJA error 1 gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an Interrupt interrupt which occurred E32 Stops Check the number of the interrupt AJAJAJA error 2 program and change it to agree with the interrrupt request Multi CPU This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH data CPU2 i i E33 is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU AlA unmatch Stops system error Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP X FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the I O status it E34 Stops abnormal unit Then turn off the power A A A A A
214. her output is used as a directional output The pulse output terminal directional output terminal and home input I O allocation is determined by the channel used For detailed information we section 9 2 1 Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact point and turning on and off the specified bit of DT9052 DT90052 For detailed information FO MV Up to two driver systems can be connected When using CHO FPO Home input 0 gt X2 Near home input Driver Pulse output Yo gt Y2 Directional switching output The near home input specifies the desired input such as X2 When using CH1 FPO Home input x1 gt X3 Near home input Driver Pulse output Y1 Y3 Directional switching output The near home input specifies the desired input such as X3 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input Since a double pulse input is used switching must be performed by an external relay One output contact is used as a pulse output for relay switching The pulse output terminal and home input I O allocation is determined by the channel used For detailed information we section 9 2 1 Set the control code for instruction F168 to No directional output For detailed information we F168 SPFD1 When using CHO FPO Home input 0
215. high level instructions are not available Note2 The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used 14 93 Num bor Name Boolean Operand Description Steps High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e F166 High speed HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the 11 counter built in high speed counter reaches the target value output set of S 1 S with channel specification F167 High speed HC1R n S Yn Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the 11 counter built in high speed counter reaches the target value output reset of S 1 S with channel specification F168 Positioning SPD1 S n Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified 5 control with output YO or Y 1 according to the contents of the channel data table beginning at S specification F169 Pulse output PLS S n Outputs a pulse from the specified output YO or 5 with channel Y1 according to the contents of the data table specification beginning at S F170 PWM output PWM S n Performs PWM output from the specified outptu 5 with channel specification YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S 14 94 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 Name 3 I 7 o we 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N o t amp 2 amp c16 C40 02 amp amp ttu High speed counter Pulse outpu
216. high speed counter and have a fast response time If used as normal inputs we recommend inserting a timer in the ladder program as chattering and noise may be interpreted as an input signal 2 14 FPO Optional Memory 2 2 Specifications 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by the temperature FPO C14RM C14CRM C14RS C14CRS at 24 V DC Number of 8 input points per common which are simultaneous 3 s s N at 26 4 V DC 35 45 55 95 113 131 Ambient temperature C F FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP at 26 4 V DC Numberof 8 input points at 24 V DC per common which are d tutore simultaneous e ON 25 50 55 113 102 131 Ambient temperature C F FP0 C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP at 26 4 V DC at 24 V DC Number of 16 input points per common D which are Bir sene onere simultaneous 6 i 1 ON 23 31 55 73 4 87 8 131 Ambient temperature C F 2 15 Optional Memory FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 4 Output Specifications 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type FPO relay output types CTORM C10CRM C10RS C10CRS C14RM C14CRM C14RS C14CRS em Description Output type Normally open 1 Form A relay output Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC
217. however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten Contacts not specified will read in the on off state according to the condition of the input from the input device Processing of external output Y Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Timer T and Counter C Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result FPO Precautions During Programming 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only 8 10 Setting the Clock Calendar Timer T32CT type only Ckock Calendar timer setting area The write area and read area for clock calendar timer is allocated to special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 Special data register Upper byte Lower byte number Hour data Minute data f m to H23 00 to H59 ot Available Minute
218. i DIN 5 pin male D sub 15 pin female PLC side 1 9 uogenime side Signal pin No Pinno Signal FG B B FG SG 1 e gt sG 50 2 1 8 RD RD 3 SD 4 L 1 45V 15W 5 a a SG 13 9 Dimensions FPO 13 7 Connection between RS232C port and PC Layout of Programming Port Pins Common for the FPO FP2 FP M 4 2 Signal name Pin No The controller s tool port is provided with the TCS7557 0121077 connector for FPO made by Hoshiden Corporation 13 7 Connection between RS232C port and PC Connection example FPO RS232C port PC D SUB 9 pin female d DOSN version Signal name CD RD SD ER SG DR RS CS Signal name SD RD SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13 10 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 14 2 FAL 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 14 3 14 1 1 Table of System Registers for FPO 14 5 14 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays 14 15 14 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for 14 18 14 2 Table of Basic Instructions ccccesseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneneeeenseneeeees 14 28 14 3 Table of High le
219. icated Output 2 ee ER scenes 8 3 8 1 1 Duplicated Output 1 2 caeceve he dae redu ee ceed sere eatem 8 3 8 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction 8 4 Handling BCD Data 22er tee e eoe e a aes 8 5 8 2 1 BOD Dala 245 tea fant aid weet 8 5 8 2 2 Handling BCD 8 6 1 8 5 Handling Index Registers 4 00 5c cece eee eee nmn 8 7 8 3 1 Index Registers to e etu gles oe rapit ic des 8 7 8 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers 8 7 8 8 8 Example of Using an Index Register 8 8 Operation ENOS rh mes HR I lacie cee eka AMD qiio t 8 10 8 4 4 Outline of Operation Errors 8 10 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs 8 10 8 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors 0 eee 8 11 8 4 4 8 12 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 13 8 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 8 13 viii FPO Table of Contents 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time 8 14 8 5 8 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction 8 16 8 6 6 8
220. ification Power Supply Unit Link Unit 12 13 12 5 1 FPO Power Supply Unit AFPO634 12 13 12 5 2 FPO I O Link Unit 92253 i bte 12 13 Specifications FPO 12 2 FPO Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type S LINK type C10RS 614 5 C16T C32T T32C SL1 C10RM C14RM C16P C32P C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C32CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP Programming method Control method Relay symbol Cyclic operation Controllable Basic unit Total 10 Total 14 Total 16 Total 32 Total 32 Max 128 points Input 6 Input 8 Input 8 Input 16 Input 16 Input 64 Output 4 Output 6 Output 8 Output 16 Output 16 Output 64 at S LINK block With expansion Max 58 Max 62 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 Max 96 unit 1 at When confi expansion gured with block same output type as control unit With expansion Max 106 Max 110 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 unit 2 When relays and transistors are mixed Program memory Built in memory Built in EEPROM without battery Program capacity 2 720 steps 5 000 steps Numbers of Basic 83 High level 145 Operation speed 0 9us step by basic instruction I O refresh and base time With no expansion board 0 3ms With expansion board s 0 3ms and 1 x number of expansion boards ms Operation Relay Intern
221. ill differ depending on the ambient temperature Refer to the table below to predict the life of the internal backup battery Note When the control unit is off when power is not supplied temperature has almost no effect on the battery life Ambient temperature Internal backup battery life 55 C Approx 430 days approx 1 year 45 C Approx 1 200 days approx 3 years 40 C Approx 2 100 days approx 6 years 35 C Approx 3 300 days approx 9 years 34 C and less Approx 10 years Range of backup possible with the internal backup battery The range that the user specifies with the programming tool from among the computation memories given below will become the holding backup area 1 Timer counter T C 2 Internal relay R 3 Data register DT 4 Step ladder If the user does not make a designation the default setting range will become the backup holding area The clock calendar timer value is also backed up The program and system registers are held in EEP ROM with no relation to the internal backup battery Handling of the internal backup battery It is not possible to replace the internal backup battery when it has been exhausted or has exceeded its life span Cautions regarding the backup of data The clock calendar timer value is backed up by the secondary battery Begin use only after the secondary battery has been sufficiently charged For reference To read and use the initial settings
222. in high speed counter reaches the target value with channel of S 1 S specification F167 Target value HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the 11 much off built in high speed counter reaches the target value with channel of S 1 S specification F171 Pulse output SPDH S n Positioning pulses are output from the specified 5 with channel channel in accordance with the contents of the specification data table that starts with S Trapezoidal control and home return F172 Pulse output PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the specified output 5 with channel in accordance with the contents of the data table specification that starts with S JOG operation F173 PWM output PWMH S n PWM output is output from the specified output in 5 with channel accordance with the contents of the data table that specification starts with S F174 Pulse output SPOH S n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel 5 with channel according to the data table specified by S specification Selectable data table control operation F175 Pulse output SPSH S n Pulses are output from channel in accordance with 5 Linear the designated data table so that the path to the interpolation target position forms a straight line F176 Pulse output SPCH S n Pulses are output from channel in accordance with 5 Circular interpolation the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an
223. in the slot specified using the A configu nues configuration data ration Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter A Available 14 132 E100 Self The error specified by the F148 to diagnostic Stop ERR P148 PERR instruction is A AAA A E199 error set occurred Take steps to clear the error condition E200 by F148 according to the specification you chose ERR P14 i foo eee nnt alalalala A E299 PERR nues instruction A Available Note Available PLC FP1 C24 C40 C56 C76 and FP M 14 133 E Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Error cade Name Description 121 NACK error Link system error 122 WACK error Link system error 123 Unit No overlap Link system error 124 Transmission format Link system error error 125 Link nithardware Link system error error 126 Unit No setting error Link system error 127 No support error Link system error 128 No response error Link system error 129 Buffer closed error Link system error 130 Time out error Link system error 132 Link system error impossible error 133 Communication stop Link system error 136 No destination error Link system error 138 Other communication Link system error error 140 BCC error A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Format error A command was receive
224. ing FINT S D The decimal part of the real number data specified 8 P333 point type PFINT in S41 S is rounded down and the result is data round stored in D 1 D ding the first decimal point down F334 Floating FRINT S D The decimal part of the real number data stored in 8 P334 point type PFRINT 551 S is rounded off and the result is stored in data round D 1 D ding the first decimal point off F335 Floating F S D The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed 8 P335 point type PF the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D data sign changes F336 Floating FABS S D Takes the absolute value of real number data 8 P336 point type PFABS specified by S 1 S and the result absolute data absolute value is stored in D 1 D F337 Floating RAD S D The data in degrees of an angle specified in 511 8 P337 point type PRAD S is converted to radians real number data and data degree the result is stored in D 1 D radian 14 114 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 S Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g c14 c24 cse cjg C20 X 9 t E t amp c46 cao C72 c32 amp amp t F331 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P331 F332 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P332 F333 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P333 F334 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A
225. input output PROG green Illuminates when in the PROG mode and indicates that operation has stopped ERROR ALARM Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic function Illuminates if a hard red ware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated 2 1 1 2 Mode Switch This switch turns ON and OFF RUN PROG the operation of the FPO The FPO can also be turned ON and OFF by the programming tool Switch position Operation mode RUN upward This sets the RUN mode The program is executed and operation begins PROG downward This sets the PROG mode When performing remote switching from the programming tool the position of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED Otherwise restart the FPO and change the mode of operation with the mode switch 2 1 1 3 Tool Port The tool port is used to connect a programming tool Pin assignment Pin no Abbreviation SD TXD SG RD RXD 5V Optional Memory 2 2 Specifications 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 General Specifications Item Description Rated operating voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 V to 26 4 V DC Rated current consumption 300 mA or less section 2 2 1 2 Allowed momen C10 C14 5 ms at 21 6 V 10 ms at 2
226. ious execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 X1 YO Previous execution of DF instruction The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained 8 16 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method A Example 2 Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO P 1 CT 100 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO X0 Counting operation Final timing at which the The count is not incremented because the final previous JP timing at which the previous JP instruction was not instruction was executed has not been changed and the execution not executed condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO X0 Counting operation Final timing at which the The count is incremented because the count input previous JP changed from off to on after the final timing at which instruction the previous JP instruction was not executed was not executed 8 17 Precautions During Programming FPO 8 6 Precautions for Programming 8 6 Precautions for Programmin Programs which do not execute correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not execute correctly Program example 1 Program in which the example 1 is rewritten ANS XO YO 5 H HoF 2 gt XO x2 jane I
227. is 2 kQ for X0 through X5 and 1 kQ for X6 and X7 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply 2 18 FPO Optional Memory 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply for driving internal circuit are the same In this situation there is only one power supply FPO C16T C16CT C32T C32CT Input side 5 6 Nm e Ses b l j Y AI circuit We e Lt e Note 1 l 5 6 kQ i 4 m 5 oS i Note 1 ri nternal RN Y ET hys 1 COM e e I Output side 4 e Y I Internal 9 d Load circuit w Yo i m N i i l v E Yn Internal 9 Load 9 circuit e Meee T 24 V DC External power supply and load voltage 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 kQ for XO through X5 and 1 kQ for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply 2 19 Optional Memory FPO 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from
228. is set for the baud rate of H4 1200 bps tool port the baud rate will H5 600 bps be 9600 bps H6 300 bps M 5 Example Setting 19 200 bps for both the tool port and RS232C port gt Write H100 Setting the Reception Buffer System Registers 417 and 418 In the default settings all areas of the data registers are set to be used as reception buffers To change the area of the data register used as the reception buffer specify the initial number in system register 417 and the volume number of words in system register 418 The reception buffer is configured as shown below Initial area specified with Number of system register 417 reception bytes Received data Number of words specified storage area by system register 418 General use Serial Communications FPO 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication 10 3 1 If None is Set for Start and Terminal Codes Relationship between the flags reception completed flag and transmission completed flag and the F144 TRNS instruction External received A B C CR D E F G data Cannot be stored when reception completed flag is on on R9038 Reception completed flag D F144 TRN
229. itable cables Connector on PLC side Product No D Sub 9 pin Mini DIN round 5 pin AFC8503 Mini DIN round 5 pin straight type AFC8503S 1 4 1 Discontinued Products of Programming Tool The Handy programming unit and connection cables AFC8521 AFC8523 went out of production in August 2006 The NPST GR went out of production in August 2003 1 10 Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Control Units Parts and 2 3 2 1 1 Control Unit Types suus 2 4 2 1 1 1 Status Indicator LEDs 2 6 2 1 1 2 2 6 2 1 1 3 TOO FOI cs bub RoR SHOES 2 6 Specifications Lac epee aor ha warts 2 7 2 2 1 General Specifications ssu 2 7 2 2 1 1 WIGM eS 2 7 2 2 1 2 Current Consumed by the Control Unit 2 8 2 2 2 Performance Specifications 2 10 2 2 3 Input Specifications uuu 2 14 2 2 3 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points 2 15 2 2 4 Output Specifications 2 16 2 2 4 1 Relay Output Type 2 16 2 2 4 2 Transistor Output Type 2 17 Internal Circuit 8 2 18 2 8 1 Relay Output Type C10RS C1OCRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM 2 18 2 3 2 Transistor Output Type 2 19 2 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT 2 1
230. k calender function Not available Available Note 3 Not available Special Pulse catch input functions Interrupt input Total 6 points to X1 50 us X2 to X5 100 us Not available RS232C port Note 4 Only units with an RS232C port Transmission speeds 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200bit s Transmission distance 3m 9 84ft Terminal block 3 pin made by phoenix Contact Co products number MKDS1 3 3 5 Communication method Half duplex Periodical interrupt 0 5ms to 30s interval Constant scan Available Password Available High speed counter function Note 5 Counter mode Addition subtraction one phase Note 7 Input point number Four channels maximum Maximum counting speed 10kHz maximum for all 4 channels Input contacts used count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 1 X4 count input ch 3 L X2 reset input Note 8 L X5 reset input Note 8 Minimum input pulse width E 50 us lt 10kHz gt 100 us lt 5kHz gt Not available Counter mode Two phase individual direction decision two phase Input point number Two channels maximum Maximum counting speed 2kHz maximum for all 2 channels Input contacts used count input ch 0 X3 count input ch 2 X1 count input ch 0 X4 count input ch 2 L X2 reset input L X5 reset input Minimum input pu
231. l be held If deleted the output memory area will be held MC MCE When writing MC MCE in structions be sure to write the instructions as a pair Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode CALL SUB RET A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED in struction Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET INT IRET An interrupt program is a program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an ad dress which follows the ED instruction Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET w next page FPO Precautions During Programming Operation of each instruc tion 8 7 4 SSTP STPE FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN FP Programmer II Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area FPWIN GR Boolean mode Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a pro gram with a step ladder area JP LOOP LB
232. l relay Note 1 63 words WRO to WR62 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as one word 16 bits of data Data register Note 1 1 660 words DTO to DT1659 6 144 words DTO to DT6143 16 384 words DTO to DT16383 Data memory used in program Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Timer Counter set value area Note 1 144 words SVO to SV143 Data memory for storing a target value of a timer and an in itial value of a counter Stores by timer counter number Timer Counter EV elapsed value area Note 1 144 words EVO to EV143 Data memory for storing the elapsed value during operation of a timer counter Stores by timer counter number Special data register 112 words DT9000 to DT9111 112 words DT90000 to DT90111 Data memory for storing specific data Various settings and error codes are stored Index register 2 words IX IY Register can be used as an ad dress of memory area and con stants modifier Control instruction point Master control relay points MCR 32 points Number of labels JP and LOOP 64 labels 255 labels Number of step ladders 128 stages 704 stages Note 1 Number of subroutines 16 subroutines 100 subrou tines Number of interrupt programs 7 programs external 6 points internal 1 point SL1 1 program internal 1 point 1
233. lable for FP X Ver2 0 or later Note4 This instruction is available for FP FP X Ver3 10 or later 14 101 Num Ber Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F262 Retrieving LEFT S1 S2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of 8 P262 data from characters from the left side of the character string character strings left side F263 Retrieving a MIDR S1 S2 S3 These instructions retrieve a character string 10 P263 character D consisting of a specified number of characters from string from a the specified position in the character string character string F264 Writing a MIDW S1 S2 D These instructions write a specified number of 12 P264 character n characters from a character string to a specified string to a position in the character string character string F265 Replacing SREP S D p n A specified number of characters in a character 12 P265 character string are rewritten starting from a specified strings position in the character string Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum MAX S1 S2 D Searches the maximum value in the word data 8 P270 value word PMAX table between the S1 and S2 and stores it in data 16 bit the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F271 Maximum DMAX S1 S2 D Searches for the maximum value in the double 8 P271 value double PDMAX word data table between the area selected with wor
234. lated power supply with an internal protective circuit e Theregulator on the FPO unit is a non insulated type e If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse w next page Wiring FPO 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit e Isolate the wiring systems to the FPO input output devices and motor devices Circuit breaker e Motor devices Insulated DC E power devices suppl Insulated DC power supply e The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned OFF before the input output power supplies e If the input output power supplies are turned OFF before the power to the control unit the FPO control unit may detect a drop in the input level and malfunction e Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power ON and OFF simultaneously for both FPO Wiring 7 9 Grounding 7 3 Grounding Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100 Other Other FPO ES RAN device CORRECT Ime Notes e
235. le Note1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later 32k and FP2 FP2SH V2 0 or later 14 59 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Floating point type real number data compare OR ORF 51 52 J Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 82 1 S2 ORF lt gt 81 82 2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORF gt ORF gt 51 82 5 es di p F gt S1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 8151 S1 S241 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORF lt 1 825 xi L Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORF F lt S1 S2 5 3 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 14 60
236. le N A Not available 14 33 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Note1 Basic function instructions 5 D On delay TML After set value n x 0 001 seconds timer contact a is set 3 4 timer to on TMR l Wi 1 After set value n x 0 01 seconds timer contact a is set 3 4 to on TMX After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer contact a is setto 3 4 on TMY After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on 4 5 Auxiliary F137 vaLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and 5 timer 16 bit STMR 5 5593 Rooop are set to on Auxiliary F183 vaLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds the specified output and 7 timer 32 bit ostm 99 597 Rg00D are set to on Time F182 Executes the filter processing for the specified input 9 REED H HER msi sat p j p processing Counter CT Cont Decrements from the preset value n 3 4 Reset n UP DOWN F118 UPEO supo Increments or decrements from the preset value S based 5 counter UDC Gourt on up donw input Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses
237. logarithm F323 Floating PWR 1 S2 D S1 1 81 5211 52 5 D 1 D 14 P323 pointtype PPWR data power F324 Floating FSQR S D Sj gt D 1 D 10 P324 point type PFSQR data square root F325 16 bit integer FLT S D Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified 6 P325 data to PFLT by S to real number data and the converted data floating point is stored in D type data conversion F326 32 bit integer DFLT S D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified 8 P326 data to PDFLT by S 1 S to real number data and the converted floating point data is stored in D 1 D type data conversion 14 110 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 Name 5 E 2 o ag Xg g c14 c24 cse cjg C20 lt 4 ra 5 t ES t amp c46 cao C72 c32 amp amp amp t F319 A A A A NA NA NA NA A A A P319 F320 A A A A NA NA NA NA NA A A A P320 F321 A A A A NA NIA NA NA NA A A A P321 F322 A A A A NA NA NA NA NA A A A P322 F323 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P323 F324 A A A A NA NIA NA NA NA A A A P324 F325 A A A A NA NIA NA NA A A A P325 F326 A A A A NA NA NIA NA NA A A A P326 e A Available N A Not available N
238. lse width 50 us lt 10kHz gt 100 us lt 5kHz gt Not available 12 4 FPO Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type S LINK type C1ORS C14RS SL1 C10RM C14RM C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM Special Pulse Output Not available functions output point function number Ie Output Not available 40Hz to 10kHz YO Y1 one point Not 6 10 frequency output available 40Hz to 5kHz Y0 Y1 two point output PWM out Output Not available Two points YO and Y1 Not put func point available tion number Note 6 Output Not available Frequency 0 15Hz to Fre Not frequency 38Hz quency available Note 9 0 15Hz to Duty 0 1 to 99 9 KHz Duty 0 1 to 99 9 Two independent points YO and Not Y1 no interpolation function available Memory Program and system EEPROM backup register Note 6 Note 12 Operation memory Areas which are held if the power Areas The oper Areas supply fails are fixed and are which are ation mem which are retained by the EEPROM held if the ory is held if the power sup backed up power sup Number of points words of the ply fails are using built ply fails are fixed hold areas in the various fixed and in charge fixed and memories are able sec are Counters 4 points retained by ondary retained by Internal relays 32 points the batter
239. me is completed the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to O X3 R903A R52 I pr H y ER Home return operations running R50 R50 R51 DF Home return operation start DT200 Control code H122 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 IH Fo mv H122 DT 200 FO MV K120 DT 201 Initial speed 120 Hz FOMV K2500 DT 202 DT202 Maximum speed 2500 Hz DT203 Acceleration decelera tion time 100 ms FO MV K100 DT 203 LLL Lu LL LJ F168SPD1 DT200 HO R903A Hu R52 HA Home return completion pulse TMX 4 K10 I pr H FOMV H4 DT9052 Near home deceleration start FOMV HO DT9052 Near home sensor Home sensor side side X3 on X4 on on Motor EE IIR Gc EE E 2500 Hz n 7 rf ci 120 Hz 0 Hz Near Home 100 ms 100 ms home sensor sensor FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function JOG operation plus direction While X5 is in the on state a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y2 does not turn on X5 H FOMV H112 DT 300 DT300 Control code H112 FO MV K300 DT 301 la s Fie9PLs prac Ho DT301 Speed 300 Hz side side xs a U JOG operation minus direction While X6 is in the on state a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y2 turns on X6 H Dis DT310 Control code H1
240. mes on 3 axes Noise immunity 1 000 Vp p with pulse widths 50ns and 1us based on in house measure ments Operating condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 2 Specifications 4 2 2 S LINK Controller Specifications He m comm cresennten cr C CE tq Rated power supply voltage 24V DC 10 Allowable ripple p p 10 max Supplied from IN 24V IN OV of the S LINK terminal block Current consumption S LINK controller current consumption including D G line current consumption note 1 24V DC 1 6A max Maximum current which can be supplied supplied to S LINK unit and I O devices from 24V OV line 24V DC 5A fuse 5A Transmission method Bi directional time divided multiple signal transmission Synchronization method Bit synchronization frame synchronization Transmission protocol S LINK protocol Transmission speed 28 5kbps Transmission delay time Max 10 7ms Transmission distance Main signal wire up to a distance to 200m max 400m when a booster is used FAN out note 2 320 Connection method T branch multi drop wiring note 3 No of input output points 64 points input 64 points output Fixed Display Transmission Green LED blinks in response to synchronization signals indicators display SEND Error indicator Red LED light up depending on the error Error address If the system error occu
241. ming FPO 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 4 Points to Check in Program Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register il Example When a data register is modified using an index register RO FO MV DTO IXDTO In this case index register IX modifies the address of data register DTO If data in IX is larger than the last address of the data register an operation error will occur If the PLC you are using is of the FPO 16 point type the last address of the data register is DT1659 If the data in IX exceeds the range of KO to K255 an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of IX are negative Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt gt BIN data conversion ie Example When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result d Example When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO H I F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur Check if the divisor of a division instruction is KO AY il Example RO I F32 DTO DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is KO an operation error will occur 8 12 FPO Precautions During
242. mmunication DT90059 DT9059 error code Tool port bit 0 1 Over run error bit 1 1 Framing error bit 2 1 Parity error RS232C port bit 8 1 Over run error bit 9 1 Framing error bit 10 1 Parity error Process DT90060 DT9060 number 0 to 15 Process DT90061 DT9061 number Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder 16 to 31 process When the process starts up the bit Process corresponding to the process number turns DT90062 DT9062 number on 1 32 to 47 Process Monitor using binary display DT90063 DT9063 number Step ladder 48 to 63 lt Example gt process DT9060 T T DT90064 DT9064 number proso L1 L1 64 to 79 15 11 7 3 0 Process No Process 1 executing 0 not executing DT90065 DT9065 number 80 to 95 Process A programming tool software can be used to DT90066 DT9066 number Write data 96 to 111 Process DT90067 DT9067 number 112 to 127 14 26 Address FPO T32 FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 Name Descriptions DT90104 DT9104 DT90105 DT9105 High speed counter elapsed value area for ch2 The elapsed value 24 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value for the high speed counter is automatically transferred to the special registers DT9104 and DT9015 DT90104 and DT90105 The value can be written by executing a DMV F1 instruciton DT90106 DT9106 DT90107
243. n 14 108 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 Name 5 E 2 o WE x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp E amp C16 C40 C72 c2 amp amp amp amp Floating point type real number operation instructions F309 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P309 F310 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P310 F311 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P311 F312 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P312 F313 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P313 F314 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P314 F315 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P315 F316 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P316 F317 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P317 F318 A A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P318 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 109 Num bas Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F319 Floating ATAN S D TAN S1 S gt D 1 D 10 P319 point type PATAN data arctangent operation F320 Floating LN S D LN S 1 S O D 1 D 10 P320 point type PLN data natural logarithm F321 Floating EXP S D EXP S 1 S 2 D 1 D 10 P321 point type PEXP data exponent F322 Floating LOG S D LOG S 1 S D 1 D 10 P322 point type PLOG data
244. n plus direction When X1 turns on a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y2 does not turn on xi R903A R12 R10 Hor Positioning operations running R10 R10 R11 DF J Positioning operations start Control code H102 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 Initial speed 500 Hz Maximum speed 5000 Hz H FOMV H102 DT 100 FO MV K500 DT 101 FO MV K5000 DT 102 FOMV K200 DT 103 Acceleration decelera tion time 200 ms FO MV KO DT 106 Movement amount hE a N LLLBII OLLI td DMV K10000 DT 104 10000 pls F168 SPD1 DT100 HO Pulse stop R903A R10 TO R12 I pr H Positioning completion pulse 1 s R12 TMX 0 K10 5000 Hz 500 Hz 0 Hz FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Relative value positioning operation minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from YO At this time directional output Y2 turns on x2 R903A R22 R20 or P Positioning operations running R20 R20 R21 DF J H Positioning operations start DT100 Control code H102 refer to instruction F168 SPD1 Initial speed 1000 Hz Maximum speed 6000 Hz H FOMV H102 DT 100 FO MV K1000 DT 101 FO MV K6000 DT 102 Acceleration decelera tion time 300 ms F1DMV K 8000 DT 104 FO MV KO DT 106 Movement amount LLL LL Lu u Lu
245. n Collector Type EBYP EIGYP oan 3 17 w next page Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 PUP EROS cuoc cos ee rese die neta 3 18 sete 3 18 3 4 2 3 19 343 NOT lU s epa eee ete 3 20 III ER 3 21 3 4 5 OZ Ll ee Mta pH 3 22 GAG EI2P itech vies ace ExEHIREREXE REEL 3 23 SAZ EOX Met eons 3 24 BAG EIOX 3 25 GAD 3 26 3 410 eee pean LP RES 9 26 OAL EISYI oto etr 3 27 3 4 12 Li Leda 3 28 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 1 Parts and Terminology 3 1 Parts and Terminology There are fourteen different expansion I O unit types available 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 o Noc FON E8RS terminal type E16RS terminal type E8RM connector type E16RM connector type E16T E16P E32T E32P E8X input type E16X input type E8YT output type E8YP output type E16YT output type E16YP output type In the next sections you will find a detailed description of each expansion unit Expansion I O Units FPO 3 1 Parts and Terminology 3 1 1 Expansion I O Unit Types E8RS E16RS E8RM E16RM terminal type connector type E16T E16P E32T E32P Ei asi TUTST STUTS 00000000 0
246. n in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 14 30 Availability FP1 FP M r Name 7 o x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 N N amp amp amp amp C16 cao C72 c2 amp amp amp g Leading N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A edge AND N A Note2 Trailing edge N A Party N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A AND N A Note2 Leading N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A edge OR N A Note2 Trailing edge N A Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A OR N A Note2 Leading N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A edge out Trailing edge N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A out Alternative N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A out AND stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A OR stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A Push stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A Note3 Read stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A Pop stack A A A A A A A A A A A A A Note3 Leading A A A A A A A A A A A A A edge differential Trailing edge A A A A A A A A A A A A A differential e A Available N A Not available Note1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models Note2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Note
247. n l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 13 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 3 Expansion Input Units E8X E16X FPO E8X E16X sid 5 6 kQ X20 0 0 Internal ee 1kQ circuit mechs mq Le 5 6 kQ Internal iv KI iko circuit e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The input number given above is the input number when the expansion input unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 14 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 4 Expansion Output Units 3 3 4 1 NPN Open Collector Type E8YT E16YT When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply for driving the internal circuit are the same In this situation there is only one power supply FPO E8YT E16YT mm i e Ld 9 Df 9 OS SSS SS SS SS MS Output side Internal Lr Y20 Load e circuit Internal ot i e Xen Toad circuit im 1 e e 24V DC External power supply and load voltage The output number given above is the o
248. n parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD lt D lt 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 8151 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD D lt 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 14 54 Availability Name FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 gt FPO gt gt FP X 32 bit data compare OR ORD gt FP e N A A A N A A gt FP3 gt FP2 gt FP2SH gt FP10SH 32 bit data A A A compare OR ORD lt gt N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare OR ORD gt N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare OR ORD gt 32 bit data A A A compare OR ORD lt N A N A N A N A 32 bit data A A A compare OR ORD lt N A N A e A Available N A Not available 14 55 Name Boolean Symbol Description Steps Floating STF Be
249. n the reception buffer Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on To resume reception execute the F144 TRNS instruction This turns off the error flag and transmits both actual and empty data 10 3 2 If Yes has been Set for the Start and Terminal Codes Start Code STX Terminal Code ETX When receiving data External received A B 6TX D E TX F G 3 6T3 H ETX data lt Cannot be The reception x stored when code is deleted on reception by the F144 completed TRNS instruc R9038 flag is on tion Reception com off pleted flag 4 on The reception com F144 TRNS pleted flag is instruction turned off by ex execution off ecuting the F144 TRNS instruction Stored Y Y Y Reception A A A A D D D D pe G wt H H buffer B B B E E E E Ewe E C C C C C C C C C C Number of recep 1 2 3 lt 0 gt lt l gt 2 2 0 1 0 lt l gt lt l gt tion bytes Write pointer Number of Number of bytes Number of bytes received received is cleared bytes received is cleared when when F144 TRNS is cleared when start code is instruction is ex start code is received ecuted received The data is stored in the reception buffer in sequential order but at the point at which the s
250. n with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver Provides trapezoidal control with the instruction F168 for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed maximum speed acceleration deceleration time and target value Instruction F168 also enables automatic home return JOG operation with the instruction F169 for pulse output while the execution condition trigger is in the on state Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 to Do not use high speed counter 9 18 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 2 Control Mode Incremental lt relative value control gt Outputs the pulse of the pulse number set by the target value By setting HO2 incremental forward off reverse on in the control code with instruction F168 when the target value is positive the directional output is turned off and the elapsed value of the high speed counter increases When the target value is negative the directional output turns on and the elapsed value of the high speed counter decreases By setting HO3 in the control code the directional output is the reverse of that above For detailed information we F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 Absolute absolute value control Outputs the pulse set by the difference between the current value and the target value The difference be
251. nals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply Optional Memory FPO 2 4 Pin Layouts 2 4 6 C32P C32CP T32CP C32P C32CP X1 X8 9 XX RUN H o N HH 3 a aay 55 E 5 5 5 o llo H COM 1 qt OM PROG vF Output Output YO Y1 o o Y8 Y9 O A 2 O Load Load Load Load 8 6 Load Load Load Load nollaa a 6 Load Load Load Load e RENAL Load Load Load Load H HH s C MN 0 x Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals X0 7 and X8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well e The terminals of output terminals YO 7 and output terminals Y8 F are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is po
252. nd consult the table of aself diagnostic error codes E MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 14 123 BI Table of Syntax Check Error Error code Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FPO FP e FPS FP X FP1 FP M FP2 FP10SH FP2SH FP3 E1 Syntax error Stops A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error gt gt gt gt gt E2 Note Duplicated output error Stops Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Change to PROG mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register20 A timer counter instructon double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected E3 Not paired error Stops For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is either missing or in an incorrect position Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions E4 Para meter mismatch error Stops An instruction h
253. nd data conversion F231 Second SECTM S D The specified second data is changed into time 6 P231 data time PSECTM data a date and time conversion 14 98 Availability zx Note1 FP M Note1 Name 3 I E o we 9 C14 C24 C56 C20 e N o 2 amp e3 E cie cso cz2 co2 amp amp amp Screen display instructions F180 N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F181 N A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Basic function instruction F182 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A NA N A N A N A Note5 Note4 F183 A A A A N A N A N A N A A N A A A A Data transfer instructions F190 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P190 F191 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P191 Logic operation instructions F215 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P215 F216 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P216 F217 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P217 F218 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P218 F219 N A A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A P219 Data conversion instructions F230 N A Partly Partly N A N A N A N A N A N A N A Partly Partly N A P230 N A N A N A N A Note3 Note6 Note2 Note2 F231 N A Partly Partly N A N A
254. nit no when connecting C NET 1 K1 1 to 32 K1 to K32 416 Modem connection Disable HO Using FPWIN GR Diable Enable Using FP programmer II Modem disabled H8000 Modem enabled 14 13 Item qug Name peau Descriptions ress value C10C C14C C16C 0 to 1659 KO to 417 Starting address setting 0 K1659 for received buffer KO C32C SL1 0 to 6143 KO to K6143 T32C 0 to 16383 KO to K16383 C10C C14 1660 Capacity C C16C K1660 2191990 K0 to K1660 setting for 6144 418 reception C32C SL1 K6144 0 to 6144 KO to K6144 buffer 16384 T32C K16384 0 to 16384 KO to K16384 14 14 14 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPO The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction Address Name Description R9000 Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs flag The self diagnostic error code is stored in DT9000 R9001 to Not used R9003 verificati Turns on when an I O verification error occurs R9004 The position number of the I O where the verification error was occurred is stored in DT9010 beet Not used Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error R9007 Operation error flag occurs hold The addres
255. not executed Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on section 8 5 2 When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as MC and MCE instructions JP and LBL instructions LOOP and LBL instructions CNDE instruction Step ladder instructions Subroutine instructions 8 5 2 Operation and Precautions at Run Start Time Operation of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation M Not executed Executed If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode use R9014 initial pulse off relay in your program on the following page R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan 8 14 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method A il Example 1 DF leading edge differential instruction Hi YO pe Xo R9014 I or Add R9014 RU
256. nput 16 Output 16 16 Output 16 nput 16 Output 16 Input 16 Output 16 Overview FPO 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 Programming Tools Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disc capacity Product No FPWIN 2 Full type Windows 95 OSR2 or higher 40 MB or more AFPS10520 English language Windows 98 inn Upgraded version Windows Me AFPS10520R Windows NT Ver 4 0 or higher Small type Windows 2000 AFPS11520 Windows XP Ime Notes 1 Customers who use the FPWIN GR Ver 1 can use the FPWIN GR Ver 2 after purchasing the upgraded version software The upgrade version software can be installed only when the Ver 1 1 has been previously installed 2 Small type version can be used for the FP e FP FPO FP X FP1 and FP M series IEC61131 3 compliant programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 5 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disc capacity Product No FPWIN GR Ver 5 Full type Windows 95 OSR2 or higher 100 MB or more AFPS50550 English language Windows 98 menu Windows Me Small type Windows NT Ver 4 0 or higher AFPS51550 Windows 2000 Windows XP Small type version can be used for the FP e FP FPO FP X FP1 and FP M series ia Note Type of computer and su
257. nsumption FPO E16RS 100 mA At power supply connector of control unit Current consumption FPO C14RS FPO E32T FPO E16T FPO E16RS FP Programmer II Ver 2 FP Programmer II Ver 2 C NET Adapter S2 Total current consumption 235 mA or less Optional Memory FPO 2 2 Specifications 2 2 2 Performance Specifications Relay output type Transistor output type C10RS C14RS C16T C32T T32C C10RM C14RM C16P C32P C10CRS C14CRS C16CT C32CT C10CRM C14CRM C16CP C32CP Programming method Control method Relay symbol Cyclic operation Controllable Basic unit Total 10 Total 14 Total 16 Total 32 Total 32 Max 128 points Input 6 Input 8 Input 8 Input 16 Input 16 Input 64 Output 4 Output 6 Output 8 Output 16 Output 16 Output 64 at S LINK block With expansion Max 58 Max 62 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 Max 96 at unit 1 When config expansion ured with same block output type as control unit With expansion Max 106 Max 110 Max 112 Max 128 Max 128 unit 2 When relays and transistors are mixed Program memory Built in memory Built in EEPROM without battery Program capacity 2 720 steps 5 000 10 000 5 000 steps steps steps Numbers of Basic 83 High level 145 Operation speed 0 9us step by basic instruction I O refresh and base time With no expansion board 0 3ms
258. ode ABIN 1 92 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and 7 P76 16 bit PABIN S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D binary data Example H 30 30 31 2D 20 20 K 100 001 F77 32 bit binary DBIA 1 S2 D Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to 11 P77 data gt ASCII PDBIA ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes code 14 74 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 b I Name 5 E 2 o WE x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp E amp C16 C40 C72 c2 amp amp amp Data conversion instructions F70 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P70 F71 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P71 F72 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P72 F73 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P73 F74 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P74 F75 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P75 F76 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P76 F77 A A A A N A A A N A A A A A A P77 e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 75 Num bos Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F78 ASCII code DABI 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and 11 P78 32 bit PDABI S2 to 32 bits of binary data and stores it in D 1 binary data D F80 16 bit binary BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by
259. old type internal relay 7 1 5 Protecting Power Supply and Output Sections An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally FPO Wiring 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit 7 2 Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit Use the power supply cable AFP0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Power suppl FPO control unit connector Power supply cable AFP0581 Green Function earth Blue 0 V mem Besiplons Rated voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC x Notes e minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable e To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insu
260. on When X3 turns on a pulse is output from YO and the return to home begins At this time directional output Y2 turns on Then when X4 turns on deceleration begins and when XO turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to O X3 R903A R42 R40 DF yes k1 i Home return operations running R40 R40 R41 DF Home return operation start R41 DT200 Control code H123 H POMY ales refer to instruction Fo MV K100 DT 201 F168 SPD1 aU ORD Initial speed 100 Hz DT202 Maximum speed FOMV K150 DT 203 2000 Hz Fiesspp1 DT 200 Ho DT203 R903A R42 I pr H Fo MV H4 DT9052 FOMV DT9052 side side Motor Le H Home return completion pulse TMX 3 K10 Near home deceleration start Near home sensor X4 on Home sensor X3 on on 2000Hz E t4 ft a 100 Hz 0 Hz i Home Near 150 ms 150 ms sensor home sensor High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Home return operation plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from YO and the return to home begins At this time directional output Y2 does not turn on Then when X4 turns on deceleration begins and when XO turns on home return is completed After the return to ho
261. on hold type and counter to a hold type By setting this value to 0 the whole area becomes hold type Also by setting it to the valeu 1 higher than the last number the whold area becomes non hold type C32 SL1 Type FPO T32 Area Timer All non hold type Counter All hold type Internal Non hold type Non hold type 10 words WRO to WR9 relay Hold type Hold type 53 words WR10 to WR62 Data register All hold type 14 6 Table of system registers C10 C14 C16 C32 T32 and SL1 in the table respectively indicate 10 point 14 point 16 point 32 point type and S LINK type FPO control units item Name perau Descriptions ress value The set values are fixed and cannot Alloca be changed The stored values vary depending on tion of 0 Sequence program area the type capacity K3 3K words FPO C10 C14 C16 y K5 5K words FPO C32 SL1 K10 10K words FPO T32 Timer and counter 100 0 to 144 5 division setting of starting counter number K100 Set the system Hold type area starting registers 5 and 6 to 6 number setting for timer 100 0 to 144 the same value and counter K100 KO to K144 Available type T32 Hold type area starting Held number setting for internal 10 Non 7 2 0 to 63 KO to K63 hold relays in word units K10 Available type T32 Hold type area starting 8 number setting for data 0 0 to 16384 KO to K163
262. on Steps Shift register SR Data una Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal relay WR data to 1 2 Shift the left Note Reset Left right F119 VR Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range specified by D1 and 5 shift register LRSR Det 8i D2 to the left or to the right Shift x Reset Control instructions Master MC Starts the master control program 2 control relay MO n A Master control area Master MCE MEER Ends the master control program 2 control relay end Jump JP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues 2 3 1 P from there Notes Label LBL LBL n 1 Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S 3 jump SJP MEN T and continues from there i Label LBL 1 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 36 Availability FP1 FP M x Name 7 o x 9 C14 C24 C56 C16 C20 e N N amp amp amp amp cte cao C72 c2 t amp amp Shift register A A A A A A A A A A A A A Left right A
263. ons F180 FP e screen SCR S1 S2 S3 Register the screen displayed on the FP e 9 display S4 registration F181 FP e screen DSP S Specify the screen to be displayed on the FP e 3 display switching Basic function instruction F182 Time FILTR S1 S2 S3 Executes the filter processing for the specified 9 constant D input processing F183 Auxiliary DSTM S D Turn on the specified output and R900D after 7 timer 32 bit 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions F190 Three 16 bit MV3 S1 S2 S3 S1 gt D S2 5 D 1 S3 gt D 2 10 P190 data move PMV3 D F191 Three 32 bit DMV3 81 S2 S3 S1 1 1 gt D 1 D 5211 S 2 gt D 3 D 2 16 P191 data move PDMV3 D 5311 53 5 D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions F215 32 bit data DAND S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 5 D 1 D 12 P215 AND PDAND F216 32 bit data DOR S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 OR S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 12 P216 OR PDOR F217 32 bit data DXOR S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S1 1 51 AND 12 P217 XOR PDXOR 5211 52 5 D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR 81 S2 D S1 1 51 AND S2 1 S2 OR S1 7 1 AND 12 P218 XNR PDXNR 5211 532 5 D 1 D F219 Double word DUNI 81 82 S8 S1 1 81 AND 5311 S3 OR S2 1 S2 AND 16 P219 32 bit data PDUNI D 5311 S3 D 1 D unites Data conversion instructions F230 Time data gt TMSEC S D The specified time data a date and time is 6 P230 second PTMSEC changed to the seco
264. ort COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 14 4 14 1 1 Table of System Registers for FPO Content of system register settings 1 Setting the timers and counters System register 5 By indicating the counter start number the timer and counter are split into two areas The timer and counter together total 144 points and the default value for th split is 100 Thus the point allotment is as shown in the table below Timer 100 points No 0 to No 99 Counter 44 points No 100 to No 143 Setting example To increase the number of timers to 120 change the value of system register 5 to K120 MIN 0 All counter Set value lt n Counter size increases Set value n Counter Set value n Timer size increases 144 MAX 144 All counter For FPO T32 set the system registers 5 and 6 to the same value This sets the timer to a non hold type and counter to a hold type By setting system register 5 to 0 the whole area becomes the counter Also by setting it to the value 144 the whole area becomes the timer 14 5 2 Hol
265. ot touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection might cause abnormal exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It might cause exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copylighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Matsushita Electric Works Ltd pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the Design and performance of its products therefore we reserve the right to change the manual product without notice FPO Introduction Introduction This manual explains hardware configurations installation wiring procedures allocations and maintenance Before You Start FPO Before You Start Installation environment Do not use the unit where it will be exposed to the following Direct
266. ote1 For the FPO FPZ FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available 14 111 Num ber Name Boolean Operand Description Steps F327 P327 Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version the largest inte ger not ex ceeding the floating point type data INT PINT S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D F328 P328 Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version the largest inte ger not ex ceeding the floating point type data DINT PDINT S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D F329 P329 Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer FIX PFIX S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D F330 P330 Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer DFIX PDFIX S D Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data
267. ount of 10000 pulses 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 500 Hz 0 Hz 200 ms 200 ms At this time the high speed counter elapsed value DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 will be increasing F Notes e For trapezoidal control set the initial speed to no more than 5000 Hz e For details on troubleshooting procedures when no pulse is output when instruction F168 SPD1 is executed refer to page 9 32 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse output instruction F169 This instruction is for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on x2 H Fo MV H112 DT200 FO MV K300 DT201 F169 PLS DT200 HO While X2 is in the on state a pulse of 300 Hz with a duty ratio of 10 is output from YO At this time directional output Y2 is off and the count of the elapsed value for the high speed counter CHO DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 increases X6 H Fo MV H123 DT200 FO MV K700 DT201 F169 PLS DT200 H1 While X6 is in the on state a pulse of 700 Hz with a duty ratio of 10 is output from Y1 At this time directional output Y3 is off and the count of the elapsed value for the high speed counter CH1 DT9048 and DT9049 DT90048 and DT90049 decreases High speed counter control instruction FO This instruction is used for resetting the built in high sp
268. ower supply to the S LINK I O devices connected to the S LINK system Turn on the external power supply to the S LINK Last turn on the power supply to the S LINK control unit itself aj snag E jen bs FF 1 Power supply of S LINK I O devices on o oen 2 External power supply for S LINK on FL_FPo su1 3 Power supply of S LINK control unit on If using the power supply of booster start up the booster before the external power supply for S LINK When turning off the power supplies reverse the order of the sequence noted above S LINK Control Unit FPO 4 5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On 4 5 Operation When Power Supply is Turned On Refreshing S LINK I O data With the S LINK control unit I O data is refreshed by the CPUs of both the FPO section and the S LINK section through the memory shared between them S LINK control unit data area refreshed gt Shared memory FPO B S LINK section section CPU CPU A fi data refreshed The illustration below shows the time required until the first refreshing is completed by the S LINK control unit after the power supply has been turned on The external power supply for the S LINK is already on
269. pe 1652 words DTO to DT1651 6112 words DTO to DT6111 Hold type 8 words DT1652 to DT1659 32 words DT6112 to DT6143 2 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 12 12 FPO Specifications 12 4 FPO SL1 S LINK Address S LINK address Deci mal S LINK address Deci mal 12 4 FPO SL1 S LINK Address S LINK address Deci mal S LINK address Deci mal S LINK address Y82 66 42 Y92 82 52 Y102 98 62 Y112 114 72 Y83 67 43 Y93 83 53 Y103 99 63 Y113 115 73 12 13 Specifications FPO 12 5 Specification Power Supply Unit I O Link Unit 12 5 Specification Power Supply Unit I O Link Unit 12 5 1 FPO Power Supply Unit AFP0634 tem Yd Specification Rated operating voltage 100 to 240 V AC Operating voltage range 85 to 264 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz Rated frequency 47 to 63 Hz phase Single phase Inrush current 30 A 0 p or less Cold start Leakage current 0 75mA Holding time 10ms Output Rated output 24V 1596 DC 0 7A Rated output current Oto 0 7A Output
270. ply connector Supply 24V DC to the power supply connector It is connected using the power supply cable AFP0581 that comes with the unit RS232C port Use this port to connect to devices with an RS232C port such as an a bar code reader or an image checker enabling data input and output Tool port RS232C specifications Pin assignment Pin no Abbreviation SD TXD Settings when shipped from the factory Default value Baud rate 9600bps Character bit 8bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1bit FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 2 Specifications 4 2 Specifications 4 2 1 General Specifications Rated operating voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6V to 26 4V DC Rated current consumption 150mA or less Allowed momentary power off time 10ms at 21 6V 10ms at 24V Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Storage temperature 20 C to 70 C 4 F to 158 F Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Storage humidity 30 to 85 RH non condensing Breakdown voltage 500V AC for 1 minute between S LINK terminal block and power supply ground terminals Insulation resistance min 100MQ measured with a 500V DC megger between S LINK terminal block and power supply ground terminals Vibration resistance 10Hz to 55Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75mm 0 030in 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98m s or more 4 ti
271. r Settings 10 2 System Register Settings Preparation for Sending and Receiving Data System Register Settings Communication is not enabled in the default settings for the RS232C port To enable communication the items outlined below must be specified using the system registers Usage purpose of the RS232C port RS232C transmission format Baudrate Reception buffer Setting the Usage Purpose of the RS232C Port System Register 412 Specify General use port this is K2 for the FP Programmer II This is the setting which enables serial communication Setting the RS232C Transmission Format System Register 413 The transmission format is as follows in the default settings With the FP Programmer Il this is H3 Data length 8 bits Parity check Yes odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminal code CR Start code STX None Set these items to match the external device connected to the RS232C port and if changing the transmission format enter settings for the pertinent individual items With the FP Programmer Il the various items should be selected in bit units as shown below and settings entered using H constants 15 6543210 LJ L Start code 0 STX None 1 STX Yes Terminal code 00 CR 01 CR and LF 10 None 11 ETX Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits Parity 00 None 01 Yes odd 11 Yes even Data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits w next page 10 5 General use Serial Communications FPO 10
272. r increases for every revision lt FPWIN GR Technical Guide Book ARCT1F332E gt is supplied with the standard ladder tool software FPWIN GR FPWIN Pro Technical Guide Book ARCT1F405E gt is supplied with the programming tool software FPWIN Pro Key Point The PDF versions are provided at our website http www mew co jp ac e fasys User registration is required Free of charge FPO Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter1 Overview fo P te 1 3 1 1 1 FPO Control UNITS hes Eds a sega pees 1 3 14 2 FPO Expansion Units Soke eee bed eae eee ede eee aes 1 4 1 1 3 Intelligent Units etoahs Auta esas Wa Oe x 1 5 1 1 4 Elie nite 1 aaah ae eon ae E e e n 1 5 1 1 5 Power Supply Unit ise exi axe E RE ER X a rae kes 1 5 1 1 6 Options and Additional Parts 0 eee eee eee 1 6 1 2 Expansion PoSSIBIIIUeS coeno m eap EE Dee needs eed Ree oe 1 7 173 Combination POSSIDIIITIGS 2 25 nni RLE ARA rene ERRAT IRE 1 8 1 3 1 Relay Output Type Units 20 eee eee 1 8 1 3 2 Transistor Output Type Units 2 0 00 eee eee 1 9 14 Programming TOO S 22 e doe ra eR es aao dp dong b Exo et 1 10 1 4 1 Discontinued Products of Programming Tool 1 10 Chapter2 Control Units 2 1 Parts and Terminology ote Rr RI sven ing Re Reads EE 2 3 2 1 1 Control 4 eee
273. ransistor output type connectors AXY52000 pressure contact tool FPO Slim 30 type Screw stop attachment plate for 30 mm 1 181 inch width the unit AFP0811 set for 10 mounting plate Slim type FPO mounting Screw stop attachment plate for FPO expansion unit Slim model AFP0803 set for 10 plate Flat type FPO mounting Screw stop attachment plate for FPO control unit Flat model AFP0804 set for 10 plate Loose wiring cable 9 leads AWG20 with Molex socket attached at Length 1 m 3 281 ft 2 cable set Moe one end 0 5 mm2 1 set 2 cables blue amp white O cable Length 3 m 9 843 ft AFP0553 2 cable set Wire pressed terminal cable 10 leads AWG22 0 3 mm with con Length 1 m 3 281 ft AFP0521 2 cable set nectors attached at one end 1 set 2 cables blue amp white Length 3 m 9 843 ft AFPO523 2 cable set Flat cable connector for If you are using flat cable connector request the part specified below for a connector with an AXM110915 FPS FPO transistor type asymmetrical design to prevent mistaken polarity 10 unit Transistor output type 1 0 cable Attaches to relay output and terminal block type Additional part AFP0802 Terminal socket 2 sockets per pack Attaches to relay output and Molex connector types Additional part AFP0801 2 sockets per pack Attaches to transistor output type Additional part AFP0807 2 sockets p
274. real number data compare AND ANF 91 82 Mk zT Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANF lt gt a v o o S l Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 81 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ANF gt ANF gt F gt S1 S2 ele Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition 8151 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ANF J F lt S1 S2 zE de Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 14 58 Name Availability FPO A n P X 6 FP M C14 C16 C24 C40 C56 C72 C16 C20 C32 FP3 N n T FP2SH 10SH FP Floating point type real number data compare AND ANF N A Partly N
275. ripple 500mV p p or less Regulation Over Current Regulation 0 74A Life time 12 5 2 FPO I O Link Unit Over Voltage Regulation Available 20 000h at 55 C item Specification Communication method Two line half duplex Synchronous method A synchronization system Transmission line Twisted cables Twisted pair cable or VCTF Min 0 75mm 2C JIS Transmission distance Total length Max 700m Twisted pair cable Max 400m VCTF Baud rate 0 5Mbps Number of I O points per one I O Link unit 64 points Note Input 32 point Output 32 point map of FPO I O Link Unit 32X 32Y Interface RS485 Communication error check method CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check This number is the number of points that I O link is available through the host PLC and the network MEWNET F In the case I O Link error flag is on valid Number of I O points are 63 points Input 31 points Output 32 points 12 14 Chapter 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 Dimensions Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit 13 3 13 1 1 FPO C10RS C10CRS C14RS C14CRS E8RS E16RS 323 33 22 2k SEE 13 3 13 1 2 FPO C10RM C10CRM C14RM C14CRM ESHM ETOHM EDIT 13 3 18 1 3 FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP E16T E16P E8X E8YT E8 YP E32T E32P E 16X E16YT EIGYP 13 4 13 1 4 FPO C32
276. rminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 5 E32T X28 X29 OM Output Output E Y28 Y29 Load gt Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load is Load Load Load s Ime Notes e The four COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as 1 well The two terminals of output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well The two terminals of the output terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input
277. rocedure 1 gt Monitor the output condition using a programming tool If the output monitored is turned ON there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 gt Forcing ON the output using a programming tool If the output indicator LED is turned ON go to input condition check If the output indicator LED remains OFF there is probably an abnormality in the FPO s output circuit Please contact your dealer 11 8 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 2 Troubleshooting Check of input condition input indicator LEDs are OFF lt Procedure 1 gt Check the wiring of the input devices lt Procedure 2 gt Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals If the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnor mality in the FPO s input circuit Please contact your dealer If the power is not properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition input indicator LEDs are ON Procedure gt Monitor the input condition using a programming tool If the input monitored is OFF there is probably an abnormality in the FPO s input circuit Please contact your dealer If the input monitored is ON check the program again Also check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check
278. rogrammer II Use the word data monitor function to read the set value area SV of the timer or counter to be changed and rewrite the value Example of changing the value of SVO from K30 to K50 Procedure 1 Execute word data monitor OP8 0 2 Read SVO Bie 3 Clear SVO 4 Write the new changing value amp Method 3 Method using the program high level instruction To change a set value of timer counter based on an input condition use a high level instruction as shown below to rewrite the value in the set value area SV of the desired timer or counter AY Example Changing the set value to K20 when input RO turns on RO __ Fo MV K20 SV3 When RO turns on the timer set value R1 TMX 3 Ki Ee s Pu changes from 5 seconds to 2 seconds T3 YO Precautions During Programming FPO 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output 8 9 Processing During Forced Input and Output Processing when forced input output is initiated during RUN Forced reset reset processing Y Input output update Y Forced set reset processing Y Operation Y Forced set reset processing Y Peripheral service Processing of external input X Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the input LED will not blink
279. ror and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 14 122 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnomal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the contect of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above a
280. rror occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when 165 Protect error theb protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data 166 Address error Alsi when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program No program error 167 area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted and No data error of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that 168 error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 170 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 71 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed 14 135 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Command name Code Description RC Reads the on and off status of contact RCS Specifies only one point Readiconiact arga RCP Specifies multipl
281. rs the error address is displayed using the red 7 segment display LED me Notes 1 For detailed information on current consumption refer to Determining the Power Supply in the S LINK Design Manual 2 The output capacitance for the D G line of the S LINK controller and booster is indicated by FAN out and the input capacitance from the D G line of the S LINK configuration unit is indicated by FAN in When configuring the S LINK system the configuration should be set up so that the FAN out total gt or the FAN in total For detailed information on calculating the FAN in value and other values see the S LINK Design Manual 3 The FPO S LINK control unit does not have a loop wiring function FPO S LINK Control Unit 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply 4 3 Wiring the Power Supply With the FPO S LINK control unit power must be supplied at two locations power supply connector and S LINK terminal block 4 3 1 Wiring to Power Supply Connector This is the power supply for the programmable controller section and the S LINK controller in the S LINK control unit 24V DC 150mA 4 3 2 Wiring to S LINK Terminal Block This is the power supply for the S LINK controller in the S LINK control unit and other S LINK input output devices to which power is supplied through the 24V OV line of the S LINK main cable The current consumption for the overall S LINK system is calculated by referring to the
282. s a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below A il Example External input relay X Decimal 12 Olsen 12 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 9 AB F Xe OK A TEE x F X10 tarta X 1F X 20 X 2T X 2F to to to X LORIE El ot X 12 10 FPO Specifications External input relay 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Numbering C32 SL1 208 points XO to X12F Function Turns on or off based on exter nal input External out put relay 208 points YO to Y12F Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay Note 1 1 008 points RO to R62F Relay which turns on or off only within program Timer Note 1 Counter Note 1 144 points TO to T99 C100 to C143 Note 2 If a TM instruction has timed out the contact with the same number turns on If a CT instruction has counted up the contact with the same number turns on Special internal relay 64 points R9000 to R903F Relay which turns on or off based on specific conditions and is used as a flag External input relay 13 words WXO to WX12 Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data External output relay WY 13 words WYO to WY12 Code for specifying 16 external output points as one word 16 bits of data Interna
283. s self diagnostic error MEWNET F Terminal station setting was not properly performed E51 terminal Conti Check stations at both ends of the A A A A station nues communication path and set them in the error terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST MEWNET F selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the I O update Conti INITIALIZE position while keeping the ES2 synchro nues mode selector in the RUN position If the AA AA nous error same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Multi CPU VO regis Abnormality was detected when the multi E53 tation Conti CPU system ws used etter nues Please contact your dealer CPU2 only The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory IC memory card lowered The BATT LED E54 card back Conti does not turn on A up battery nues Charge or replace the backup battry of IC error memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC IC memory memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on E55 Card Backs Cont Charge or replace the backup battery of AJA up battery inues C memory card error The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed Incompat The IC memory card installed is not E56 ible IC Cont compatible ALA memory inues Replace the IC memory card compatible card error with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 No unit for The MEWNET W2 link unit is not E57 the Conti installed
284. s the data to another station in the network 9 P145 PSEND MEWNET F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 N D Receives the data to another station in the network 9 P146 PRECV MEWNET F145 Data send SEND S1 S2 D N Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD 9 P145 bus master F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 N D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9 P146 MOD bus master F145 Data send SEND 1 92 D N Sends the data to the slave station as the 9 P145 MEWTOCOL master F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 N D Receives the data from the slave station as the 9 P146 MEWTOCOL master F147 Printout PR S D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting 5 with S for printing and outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR n Stores the self diagnostic error number n in 3 P148 diagnostic PERR n k100 to DT9000 for FPO FP e FP1 FP M FP3 or DT90000 error set K299 for FPO T32 FPX FP2 FP2SH FP10SH turns R9000 on and turns on the ERROR LED 14 88 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 lt Name 3 I 7 o we Xe C14 C24 C56 cje C20 x Ed e t amp 2 amp c16 C40 C72 catt t tk F142 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A P142 F143 A A A A N A A A A A A A A A P143 F144 A N A A A N A A A N A A N A A A A F145 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A A A A A P145 F146 N
285. s where the error occurred is stored in DT9017 Indicates the first operation error which occurred Operation error flag Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs R9008 non hold The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT9018 The contents change each time a new error occurs Turns on for an instant R9009 Carry flag when an overflow or underflow occurs when 1 is set by one of the shift instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become R900A gt Flag larger in the F60 CMP to F63 DWIN comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B Flag instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become R900C lt Flag smaller in the F60 CMP to F63 DWIN comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM R900D contact auxiliary timer instruction It turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off R900E Tool port error flag This turns on when an error occurs during communication with a programming tool Constant scan error Turns on when the scan time exceeds the time specified in R900F flag system register 34 during constant scan execution R9010 Always on relay Always on R9011 Alw
286. se Output FUFCHODS vi oir Grex tem nee dois 9 22 9 45 Sample Program for Positioning Control 9 25 w next page High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 5 PWM Output Function ein d Neb eee 9 33 9 5 1 Outline of PWM Output Function 9 33 9 5 2 Instruction Used with PWM Output FUNCTION 5 ra tti bacs 9 33 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 1 Outline of Functions 9 1 Outline of Functions 9 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter Functions that use the built in high speed counter There are three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FPO High speed counter function The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Roller Cutter C Lead wire tape Inverter START STOP signal Encoder output is FPO input to the high speed counter Cutter blade control signal Pulse output function Combined with a commercially available motor driver the pulse output function enables positioning control With the appropriate instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Stepping motor Servo motor FPO Pulse output yo H L motor y2 CW CCW output driver P
287. short circuit will occur when in this state the GND terminal and functional earth are connected Q Outside Outside structure structure FPO Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring 7 4 Input Wiring eS Notes e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and so that the input wiring is separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 3 937 in In this section you find some examples for wiring sensors an LED equipped reed switch a two wire type sensor and a LED equipped limit switch 7 4 1 Sensors Relay output type Input terminal Sensor Internal OO circuit x Power supply Power supply for sensor for input Universal output type us Internal Input terminal FPO COM circuit Power supply for input PNP open collector output type Input terminal Sensor FPO Internal circuit Power supply for input NPN open collector output type Input terminal Sensor Internal circuit Power supply for input Two wire type next page Y Input terminal Sensor FPO a m COM Internal circuit Power supply for input Wiring FP
288. sible during RUN When a syntax error has occurred During forced input output operation Interrupt Restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If arewrite during RUN is executed the following problems may occur Exercise caution Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again M Ww Example Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 ICTL S1 S2 R9034 The high speed counter will continue to count At 2 5 kHz or higher during one phase one channel counting or 1 25 Hz or higher during one phase two channel counting miscounts may occur Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence programs will be disabled Pulse output and PWM output will be stopped The F168 instruction positioning control will continue to operate However when the maximum output frequency is higher than 2 5 kHz during one phase one channel counting or 1 25 Hz during one phase two channel counting the output pulse number may differ from the set number Precautions During Programming FPO 8 7 8 7 3 Rewrite procedure Rewrite Function During RUN FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is ex ecuted online the program will be rewritten Block b Block a Procedures an
289. ssary to set system registers 400 and 401 For detailed information we section 9 3 2 Types of Input Modes Incremental input mode xao LE E U of Count 9 1 2 3 4 n 3 n 2 n 1 n Decremental input mode w Ps ees ks Cout n 1 n 2 n 3 n4 aci T n sg o High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 3 High speed Counter Function 2 phase input mode Incremental input CW qe dl 59 f off on xe peo pe cae eee nr Sa Ee Count 0 1 2 n 1 n Decremental input CCW gu qn peres zip f off on qoos cp es Count n n 1 n 2 n 3 2 1 Incremental decremental input mode separate input mode on Xo BE Lf Li Li xj Li Li E off on y o c es Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing p Directional distinction mode on on xi M1 L oi Count 0 1 2 3 4 8 211 0 Increasing Decreasing 9 10 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 3 O Allocation The inputting as shown in the table on section 9 2 1 will differ depending on the channel number being used The output turned on and of
290. ssible for the input voltage supply FPO Optional Memory 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type Recharging the internal backup battery A secondary battery rechargeable type is used as the backup battery in the control unit 10 K step type When shipped this battery is not charged therefore please make sure it is sufficiently charged before using Recharging is automatic when DC power is supplied When backup is possible of operation memory Relationship between recharging time and backup time The number of days for the backup time changes with the proportion of recharging time Please use the graph below to verify the number of days for the backup time Relationship between recharging time and backup time B 190 a 80 96 50day 25 C 40day 25 C s 60 SMS p 30 day 25 C t 20 m 10 day 25 C e I l 0 8 16 24 48 72 Recharging time h Number of days for backup depending on ambient temperature The number of days for the backup differs as shown in the table below when recharging is done for 72 hours at a certain ambient temperature Number of days for backup time 70 C Approx 14 days 25 C Approx 50 days 20 C Approx 25 days Optional Memory FPO 2 5 Backing Up the 10 K Step Type Predicted life of internal backup battery When the control unit is on when power is supplied the internal backup battery life w
291. sunlight and ambient temperatures outside the range of 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F Ambient humidity outside the range of 30 to 85 RH and sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corresive gas Excessive vibration or shock Excessive airborne dust or metal particles Water in any from including spray or mist Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Static electricity Cleaning In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity Do not use thinner based cleaners because they deform the unit case and fade the colors Power supplies An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the FPO control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse FPO Before You Start Power supply sequence e Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the
292. t 3 2 1 0 0 Transmission point Start codes STX and terminal codes ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted and the data is transmitted to an external device For information on start and terminal code settings see section 10 2 Executing the F144 TRNS instruction turns off the transmission completed flag R9039 Duplex transmission is disabled while the F144 TRNS instruction is being executed Check the transmission completed flag R9039 to determine whether duplex transmission is possible 10 10 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 17 7 11 2 Self Diagnostic 11 3 11 1 1 Allowing Duplicated Output 11 4 11 1 2 Continuing After an Operation Error 11 4 sie Aes ees 11 5 11 2 1 ERROR ALARM LED is Blinking 11 5 11 2 2 ERROR ALARM LED is ON 11 7 11 23 AULEDS are OFF axes Sore 11 7 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction 11 8 11 2 5 PROTECT ERROR is Displayed 11 10 11 2 6 Program Mode does not Change to RUN 11 10 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting FPO 11 2 FPO Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function 11 1 Self Diagnostic Function The FPO control unit has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary When an error occurs the st
293. t Fo Mv H DT9054 Set 0 minutes and 0 seconds Mv H 512 DT9055 Set Sth day 12 o clock Fo Mv H8000 DT9058 Adjust time Caution regarding backup of clock calendar timer data Clock Calendar timer values are backed up in the secondary battery Do not use until the secondary battery has been sufficiently charged When first used no value has been determined therefore please write values using a programming tool or similar Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 PWM Output Outline of Functions 9 3 9 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed 9 3 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed po CTI Rm 9 4 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 5 92 1 Specifications eb xx 9 5 9 2 2 Functions and Restrictions 9 7 High speed Counter Function 9 9 9 8 1 Outline of High speed Counter Function 9 9 9 3 2 Types of Input Modes 9 9 9 3 3 NO Allocation 9 11 9 8 4 Instructions Used with High speed Counter FUNCHOR MNT 9 12 9 3 5 Sample Program 9 14 Pulse Output Function cece 9 18 9 4 1 Outline of Pulse Output Function 9 18 9 4 2 Control Mode 9 19 9 45 VO Allocation and Wiring 9 20 9 4 4 Instructions Used with Pul
294. t ST XYRTCLEE Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open 1 2 contact Start Not ST XYRTCLEE Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed 1 2 contact Out OT YRLE Outputs the operated result to the specified output 1 2 Not Inverts the operated result up to this instruction 1 AND AN X Y R T C L P E Connects a Form A normally open contact serially 1 2 AND Not AN XYRTCOLEE Connects a Form B normally closed contact serially 1 2 OR OR VETOMBE Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel 1 2 OR Not OR CxXvavevreeg Connects a Form B normally closed contact in parallel 1 2 f Leading sTt XX BeBe fh BEE Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the 2 edge start WE leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge STL XX ERSGLEE Begins a logic operation only for one scan when the trailing 2 start pp edge of the trigger is detected Note1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 14 28 Availability FP M Name N x 9 C14 C24 C56 C20 o e A A n n C16 n
295. t X3 as high speed counter 2 phase input X3 X4 2 phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X5 Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Direction decision X3 X4 Direction decision X3 X4 Reset input X5 Do not set X4 as high speed counter CH3 Do not set X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 HO CH2 CH3 0 Do not use high H o speed counter A 1 2 phase input X3 X4 2 2 phase input X3 X4 Reset input XS Incremental input X3 4 Incremental input X3 Reset input XS Decremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Reset input X5 Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 9 Direction decision X3 X4 A Direction decision X3 X4 Reset V input X5 e o o on 0 Do not use high speed counter 3 Incremental input X4 4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input V X5 o Note1 If the operation mode is set to 2 phase individual or direction differentiation the setting for CH3 is invalid Note2 If reset input settings overlap the s
296. t in backup battery have been charged before using the unit 12 The program system registers and the hold type areas internal relay data register and counter are backed up by the built in EEPROM 12 6 FPO Specifications 12 1 Performance Specifications 557 Notes 13 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 100 000 or less 14 The possible number of write times by the EEP ROM write instruction is 10 000 or less 15 If the power supply is turned off while the P13 instruction is being executed the data written by the P13 instruction may not be written in the EEPROM properly Also the area where the internal relays data registers and timer counter are held may not be held properly Do not turn off the power supply while the P13 instruction is being executed Specifications FPO 12 2 O Allocation Table 12 2 I O Allocation Table FPO Control Units The allocation of the FPO control unit is fixed Type of Control Unit I O number C10 series Input 6 points to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 C14 series Input 8 points to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 C16 series Input 8 points to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 C32 T32 series Input 16 points to Output 16 points YO to YF S LINK Control Units The allocation of the S LINK control unit is fixed UM GT S LINK address Input 64 points X80 to X8F Oto 15 X9
297. t in index register IX 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and stored in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of IX A il Example 2 External output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch WYO Timer elapsed gt E c Lu ower PLC Timer e number 1 Digital setting switches WX1 R1 HDF F81 BIN wd IX 1 F80 BCD IXEVo Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IX Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by IX to BCD and output it to word external output relay WYO Precautions During Programming FPO 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the FPO control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT9000 The error address is stored in special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 Types of Operation Error Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD da
298. t instruction for FPO FP e F166 A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F167 A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F168 A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F169 A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A F170 A N A N A A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type high level instructions are not available Note2 The elapsed value area varies depending on the channel being used 14 95 Num Ber Name Boolean Operand Description Steps High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FO High speed MV S DT90052 Performs high speed counter and Pulse output 5 counter and controls according to the control code specified by Pulse output S The control code is stored in DT90052 controls F1 Change and DMV FP Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and 7 read of the S DT90044 Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 elapsed value FP X DT90044 of high speed S DT90300 counter and FP Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse 7 Pulse output DT90044 D output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to FP X D 1 D DT90300 D F166 Target value HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the 11 much on built
299. ta when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 8 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs However when you set system register 26 to continuation KI the FPO control unit operates even if an operation error occurs 8 10 FPO Precautions During Programming 8 4 Operation Errors 8 4 8 Dealing with Operation Errors Procedure 1 Checkthe location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT9017 and DT9018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error If the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared In FP Programmer II press the following keys bes Le JC JU JU ede fier An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a F148 self diagnostic error set instruction 8 11 Precautions During Program
300. tart code is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer When the F144 TRNS instruction is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer is returned to the initial address in the reception buffer If there are two start codes data following the later start code is overwritten and stored in the reception buffer Reception is disabled while the reception completed flag R9038 is on The reception completed flag R9038 is turned off by the F144 TRNS instruction Because of this if the F144 TRNS instruction is executed at the same time that the terminal code is received the reception completed flag will not be detected General use Serial Communications FPO 10 3 Operations When Using General use Serial Communication When sending data Transmitted data 6 b T STX c d e ETR ry Transmission Transmission R9039 I meum Transmission completed flag of i on F144 TRNS in disabled while F144 struction execution TRNS instruction is being executed Duplex transmission lt Send buffer a lala a a C bef C C La d d d d a e e e e e H Number of bytes not yet sent lt 2 gt 1 0 lt 0 g
301. the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load voltage 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be connected FPO C16T C16CT C32T C32CT T32CT So putside 5 6 kQ e Y Internal circuit ES T Note 1 ek C o o l 1 X1 O hd e Internal td cs 2H Note i circuit k T 1 eser 1 5 6 kQ e on O 9 pF Internal eee nh Note tlt 24VDC circuit T Note 2 COM gt e LI Output side Ur dd T YO Internal F e e Load for 5 V circuit aS J o o e 1 L1 Internal Lj Y1 Load for5V 4 circuit a 7 e caca NE Es ZN AN e e e e LI Hs ed ael LI j Internal KL 7 Yn_ Load for 24 V 24V DC circuit Ll w 5VDC i External ZIN m Rated load ww power supply voltage for driving doo e internal circuit 1 The resistor in the control unit is 2 kQ for XO through X5 and 1 kQ for X6 through XF 2 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Optional Memory 2 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 2 3 2 2 PNP Open Collector Type
302. the high speed counter disable counting stop high speed counter instruction F168 and clear the high speed counter Control code setting Control code ii Sortware reset 0 Yes 1 Disable Count 0 Enable 1 Disable Hardware reset 0 Enable 1 Disable High speed counter clear 0 Continue 1 Clear Software is not reset HO 0000 Perform software reset H1 0001 Disable count H2 0010 Disable hardware reset H4 0100 Stop pulse output clear instruction H8 1000 Perform software reset and stop pulse output H9 1001 The 16 bits of DT9052 DT90052 are allocated in groups of four to high speed channels 0 to 3 as shown below bit 15 DT9052 DT90052 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 A for ch3 for ch2 for ch for chO A hardware reset disable is only effective when using the reset input X2 and X5 In all other cases it is ignored When using pulse output a hardware reset input is equivalent to an home point proximate input DT90053 Clock calendar monitor hour minute Hour and minute data of the clock calendar are stored here This data is read only data it cannot be overwritten Higher 8 bits T Lower 8 bits T 4 Hour data Minute data 0 to H23 BCD 0 to H59 BCD 14 23 Address FPO C10 aupa EPO T32 C14 C16 Name Descriptions C32 SL1 The year
303. the serial R9038 completed flag data communicating Turns on while data is not send during the serial data R9039 RS232C transmission communicating completed flag Turns off while data is being sent during the serial data communicating High speed R903A counter control k Turns on while the high speed counter instructions flag F166 HC1S to F170 PWM are executed R903B cio e chi Turns on while the high speed counter instructions flag F166 HC1S to F170 PWM are executed R903C ch2 Turns on while the high speed counter instructions flag F166 HC1S to F170 PWM are executed R903D ch3 Turns on while the high speed counter instructions flag F166 HC1S to F170 PWM are executed R903E R903F Not used Note Used by the system 14 17 14 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FPO The special data registers are one word 16 bit memory areas which store specific information With the exception of registers for which Writing is possible is indicated in the Description column these registers cannot be written to Address FPO C10 C14 C16 C32 SL1 FPO T32 Name Descriptions Self diagnostic error DT90000 code DT9000 The self diagnostic error code is stored here when a self diagnostic error occurs Monitor the error code using decimal display DT90010 DT9010 verify error unit The position of the I O for which an error occurred is store
304. tion 5th edition 6th edition j PRINTED WITH These materials are printed on ECF pulp ey SOY INK These materials are printed with earth friendly vegetable based soybean oil ink 3 Please contact Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Automation Controls Business Unit W Head Office 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan W Telephone 81 6 6908 1050 W Facsimile 81 6 6908 5781 http www mew co jp ac e All Rights Reserved O 2007 COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Printed in Japan ARCT1F389E 2 200706 Specifications are subject to change without notice ACG M389E 2
305. tion address where the operation error occurred Then correct the program In the FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 to find the instruction address where the operation error occurred Then correct the program Verification is possible in GR Pro at l O error in the status display function 14 130 A Available Error code Name Opera tion status Description and steps to take FPO FP e FPS FP X FP1 FP M FP2 FP10SH FP2SH FP3 E46 Remote y o commu nication error Selec table S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been deteced error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using System register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO Selec table MEWNET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using System register27 to continue operation set K1
306. tion changes from off to on When this method is used the program itself will change Thus when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is turned on the changed set value will be preset FPO Precautions During Programming 8 8 Changing the Set Value of Timer Counter During RUN 8 8 2 Method of Rewriting a Value in the Set Value Area Transfers to SV area when mode changes to RUN mode Timer set value aE ci 5 30 aa 30 5 YO Y This method rewrites the value in the set value area The program itself is not rewritten Changing values in the set value area SV Values in the set value area SV can be changed with the following procedures Method using the programming tool software FPWIN GR Method using the FP Programmer II Method using the program high level instruction Operation and cautions after the change After the change the timer or counter in operation will continue to run Operation based on the changed set value will be started the next time the execution condition changes from off to on With these methods the value in the set value area SV will change however the program itself will not change Therefore when the mode is changed and then set back to RUN or when the power is turned on operation will take place as follows When a set value in the program is specified by a constant K The constant K is preset in the s
307. to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F Input CH1 3 5 7 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WX5 X50 to X5F WX7 X70 to X7F AOAV Input 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F Output CHO 2 4 6 16 points wy2 Y20 to Y2F wy4 Y40 to Y4F WY6 Y60 to Y6F Output CH1 3 5 7 16 points WY3 Y30 to Y3F WY5 Y50 to Y5F WY7 Y70 to Y7F Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F Output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to YSF Y60 to Y7F The channel data of 4 TC8 A04V and 4 will switch and be read or written by a user program that contains the conversion data switch flag Please verify with the manual for the FPO CC Link Slave unit I O Allocation FPO 5 3 Expansion I O Unit Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Installation Adding Expansion 85 6 3 Important Notes 52 ek e Ree Bee et 6 5 Attachment to DIN 5 6 8 Installation Using FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 6 9 Installation Using FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 6 10 Installation FPO FPO Installation 6 1 Adding Expansion Units 6 1 Adding Expansion Units Expansion method 1 Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal connector is exposed Ss ar BD Seal Ks
308. tput Type E8RS E8RM E16RS E16RM FPO E8RS E8RM E16RS E16RM Input side 5 6 kQ MW X20 o 8 Nee i Internal circuit TKR i Gaa 5 6 i e M p ENG e Internal Fel Sth circuit i com e e E 24 V DC Note L Output side Y20 Load Internal E t circuit 7 i 1 yen Q Load 9 Internal E i circuit 2 l ASOM Power e supply e Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e Thel O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 10 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram 3 3 2 Transistor Output Type 3 3 2 1 NPN Open Collector Type E16T E32T When the load voltage and external power supply are the same This example is when the values of the rated load voltage and external power supply for driving internal circuit are the same In this situation there is only one power supply Input side 5 6 kQ x2 D MW FPO E16T E32T Internal d circuit
309. tween the current value and the target value is the output pulse number By setting H12 absolute forward off reverse on in the control code with instruction F168 when the current value is less than the target value the directional output is turned off and the elapsed value of the high speed counter increases When the current value is greater than the target value the directional output turns on and the elapsed value of the high speed counter decreases By setting H13 in the control code the directional output is the reverse of that above For detailed information F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 Home return Until the home input XO or X1 is entered by executing instruction F168 the pulse is continuously output To decelerate the movement when near the home set the bit corresponding to DT9052 DT90052 to off on off with the near home input For detailed information FO MV F168 SPD1 and section 9 4 5 JOG operation Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for instruction F169 is in the on state The directional output and output frequency are specified by instruction F169 For detailed information we F169 PLS and section 9 4 5 9 19 High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 3 VO Allocation and Wiring Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input One output point is used as a pulse output and the ot
310. ty measures listed in the following 7 1 1 Interlock Circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit that prevents clockwise and counter clockwise signals from inputting into the motor at the same time 7 1 2 Emergency Stop Circuit Add an emergency stop circuit to controlled devices in order to prevent a system shutdown or an irreparable accident when malfunction occurs 7 1 3 Start Up Sequence The FPO should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e Set the mode switch from PROG mode to RUN mode after power is supplied to all of the outside devices e Program the FPO so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized x Note When stopping the operation of FPO also have the I O devices turned OFF after the FPO has stopped operating w next page Wiring FPO 7 1 Safety Instructions 7 1 4 Momentary Power Failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms the FPO continues to operate If the power is OFF for 5 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset If operation is to be continued following recovery from the momentary power failure use an automatic retaining sequence program that uses a h
311. ue A ese il Example 1 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter example of writing the elapsed value x L DF F1 DMV K3000 DT9044 A il Example 2 Reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter to DT100 X7 H DF F1 DMV DT9044 DT100 Each time the ED instruction is executed the elapsed value is automatically transferred from the elapsed value area to the special data registers DT9044 and DT9045 DT90044 and DT90045 9 24 FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 5 Sample Program for Positioning Control Wiring example FPO Input terminal Home sensor XO Positioning start x1 ue y A Positioning start x2 O e Home return start x3 Oo o e Near home sensor x4 Forward JOG start X5 Oo Reverse JOG start X6 Oo o e Overrun X7 c Cy a contact b contact a contact b contact Stepping motor Moving table side side Stepping motor driver Output terminal Pulse output YO Pulse input COM Directional input Directional output See note 24 V DC power supply i Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V photo coupler type connect a 2 KQ 1 4 W resistor High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 4 Pulse Output Function Relative value positioning operatio
312. ulse frequency 1440 Hz to 5 kHz 720 Hz to 5 kHz 360 Hz to 5kHz 180 Hz to 5 kHz 90 Hz to 5 kHz 45 Hz to 5 kHz Switches between 6 ranges Internal connection between pulse output and counter input Not possible Not possible Possible Switching of the pulse frequency range is supported by CPU Ver 2 7 or later In versions prior to CPU Ver 2 7 the range is fixed at 360 Hz to 5 kHz In Ver 2 7 or later but prior to CPU Ver 2 9 switching is possible among 4 ranges 360 Hz to 5 kHz 180 Hz to 5 kHz 90 Hz to 5 kHz 45 Hz to 5 kHz In CPU Ver 2 9 and later versions switching is possible among 6 ranges 14 92 Availability Note1 FP M Note1 5 I Name 3 I 7 e we Xs 9 C14 C24 C56 T C20 i o e t t E amp c16 cao C72 02 amp amp ttu BIN arithmetic instruction F160 N A A A N A N A NA N A N A N A A A A A P160 Special instructions High speed counter instructions FO A N A N A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A F1 A N A N A A A A A A A N A N A N A N A F162 N A N A N A N A A A A A A N A N A N A N A F163 N A N A N A N A A A A A A N A N A N A N A F164 N A N A N A N A A A A A A N A N A N A N A F165 N A N A N A N A A A A N A A N A N A N A N A e A Available N A Not available Note1 For the FPO FPX FP X FP1 FP M the P type
313. ulse output J Y1 gt Motor CW CCW output driver Stepping motor Servo motor High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output FPO 9 1 Outline of Functions PWM output function By using the appropriate instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio When you increase the pulse width IU Ul heating 2 increases When you decrease it heating decreases 9 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter Channel number There are four channels for the built in high speed counter The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range K 8388608 to K8388607 HFF8000 to H7FFFFF Coded 24 bit binary FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 1 Specifications Table of high speed counter function specifications Input output contact number Built in Memory area used Performance specifica Related being used high tions instruc On off Count Input cdd Control Elapsed Minimum Maximum tops output mode contact channel flag value input counting speed number no area pulse value in 3 width Using Using paren only 1 mul thesis is chan tiple reset nel chan input nels DT9044 DT9046
314. ulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set Values for Timer Counter Instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of Rewrite During RUN Completed Flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program Supported in CPU Ver 2 0 and subsequent versions 8 19 Precautions During Programming FPO 8 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 8 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations x Timeout error while changing program in PLC Program may differ from PLC Please click below Help button to find the way how to solve it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again After t
315. unit is determined by the installation location E8RS E8RM Input 4 points I O number i nnununnm NRORURREES nuunuu L Third expansion Second expansion First expansion Control unit First expansion X20 to X23 Second expansion X40 to X43 Third expansion X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 E8YT E8YP Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16RS E16RM E16T E16P Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 E16X Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F E16YT E16YP Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F E32T E32P Input 16 points X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Output 16 points Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F A21 Input channel 0 16 points WX2 X20 to X2F WX4 X40 to X4F WX6 X60 to X6F Input channel 1 16 points Output 16 points WX3 X30 to X3F WY2 Y20 to Y2F WX5 X50 to X5F WY4 Y40 to Y4F WX7 X70 to X7F WY6 Y60 to Y6F A80 TC4 TC8 Input CHO 2 4 6 16 points WX2 X20
316. using the pulse output function will differ depending on the output contact number as shown in the table A il Example 1 When using either only YO or only Y1 the maximum output frequency is 10 kHz AY il Example 2 When using the two contacts YO and Y1 the maximum output frequency is 5 kHz When using the high speed counter function and pulse output function specifications will differ depending on the conditions of use AY il Example When using one pulse output contact with a maximum output frequency of 5 kHz the maximum counting speed of the high speed counter being used simultaneously is 5 kHz with the incremental mode and 1 kHz with the 2 phase mode FPO High speed Counter Pulse Output PWM Output 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 1 Outline of High speed Counter Function High speed counter function The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output The high speed counter function is able to count high speed pulses of frequencies up to 10 kHz To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match on instruction F166 To turn off an output use the target value match off instruction F167 Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is nece
317. utput number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 15 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram When the load voltage differs from the 24 V DC external power supply for the driving the internal circuit Other than 24 V DC load voltage 5 V DC and 12 V DC and other load voltages can be connected FPO E8YT E16YT z Output side put side EDENE Y20 Load for 5 V Internal circuit Ese t E e e we 21 o Load for 5 V o Internal circuit gt A Ky T La ZN L KL L Internal circuit L iG Load for AEV DO p lo 5VDC a 24VDC EE Rated load External voltage power supply Q e for driving internal circuit The output number given above is the output number when the expansion output unit is installed as the first expansion unit section 5 3 3 16 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 3 4 2 PNP Open Collector Type E8YP E16YP FPO E8YP E16YP bo NR 4 Output side e 3 3 Internal Circuit Diagram Internal circuit Internal J circuit Load me Note Loa
318. vel Instructions ssseseeeeeene 14 62 14 4 Table ol Error Cod SS tte to toa puteo akiste 14 122 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 14 136 14 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeneee enn 14 137 NAF 5 468 14 138 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precation for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of user memory System registers 0 1 and 2 These registers set the size of the program area and file register area allowing the user memory area to be configured for the environment used The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type 2 Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 3 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 18 When these registers are set to hold type the values
319. ver allows simple attachment to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on FPO slim type mounting plate AFP0803 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 2 Specifications 3 2 Specifications 3 2 1 General Specifications For more details on the general specifications refer to section 2 2 1 3 2 2 Input Specifications tem Description Insulation method optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Rated input current approx 4 3 mA at 24 V DC Input impedance approx 5 6 ko Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Input points E8RS 4 points common per common E8RM Note E16RS 8 points common E16RM E16T E16P E32T E32P 16 points common E16X ON voltage ON current 19 2 V or less 3 mA or less OFF voltage OFF current 2 4 V or more 1 mA or more Response time OFF lt gt ON 2 ms or less t24VD s C 66 T us ON lt OFF the same as above Operating mode indicator LED Note Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply FPO Expansion I O Units 3 2 2 1 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input ON Points Specifications Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously ON within the following range as determined by the temperature FPO E16RS Number of 8 input points per common which are simultaneous ON E16RM at 24 V DC 47 55 116 6 131
320. y X X XF Decimal RTO AD ices eat X1F 1 2 9 2 4 er ae X2F AB F Hexadecimal 1 23 Specifying and Y numbers On the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example The same number X20 and Y20 can be used for input and output Allocation FPO 5 2 Control Unit 5 2 Control Unit The allocation of the FPO control unit is fixed VO number C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM Input 6 points to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Input 8 points to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 C16T C16CT C16P C16CP Input 8 points X0 to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 C327 C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP Input 16 points to XF Output 16 points YO to YF S LINK Control Unit The allocation of the S LINK control unit is fixed S UNKaddes Cd Input 64 points X80 to X8F 0 to 15 X90 to X9F 16 to 31 X100 to X10F 32 to 47 X110 to X11F 48 to 63 Output 64 points Y80 to Y8F 64 to 79 Y90 to Y9F 80 to 95 Y100 to Y10F 96 to 111 Y110 to Y11F 112 to 127 FPO Allocation 5 3 Expansion I O Unit 5 3 Expansion I O Unit Up to three expansion I O units can be added numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically by the FPO control unit when an expansion I O unit is added The allocation of expansion
321. y so the Date registers 8 words EEPROM the hold EEROM Note 13 Number type mem Number of points ory areas of points words of can be words of the fixed specified the fixed hold areas using the hold areas in the program in the various ming tools various memories Note 11 memories Counters Counters 16 points Memory 16 points areas Internal re which can Internal re lays 128 bespeci lays 128 points fied points Date Timers Date registers Counters registers 32 words Internal re 32 words Note 14 lays Data Note 14 registers Backup by the Available for all data registers F12 F13 instruction w next page 55 Notes 1 Hold or non hold type can be set using the system registers 12 5 Specifications FPO 12 1 Performance Specifications 2 The proportion of timer points to counter points can be changed using a system register 5 3 Precision of calender timer At 0 C 32 F less than 139 second error per month At 25 C 77 F less than 72 seconds error per month At 55 C 131 F less than 169 seconds error per month This accuracy is considered to be the worst fluctuation coefficient value based on fluctuations in the normal voltage of 5V and the battery backup voltage of 3V Also F157 and F158 time date addition and subtraction instructions cannot be used 4 Although it has adequate tolerance noise it is r
322. y 12 14 Chapter 13 Dimensions 13 1 Control Unit and Expansion I O Unit 0 2c eee 13 3 13 1 1 FPO C10RS C10CRS C14RS C14CRS ESRS EVORS jaca idan tats Tg sere asap Ree Re ERR E sch 13 3 13 1 2 FPO C10RM C10CRM C14RM C14CRM EGRM EIGAM scsi ssn wanes od ON Bee Rabe A EHE 13 3 13 1 3 FPO C16T C16CT C16P C16CP E16T E16P E8X E8YT E8YP E32T E32P E16X E16YT E16YP c iiec x xs 13 4 FPO Table of Contents 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 1 4 FPO C32T C32CT C32P C32CP T32CT T32CP 13 4 13 1 5 FPO S LINK Control Unit ae ees alte eed 13 5 FPO Power Supply Unit meet RETE eR teen dE 13 5 Mounting on DIN Rail m ones Cela soe e prete s 13 6 FPO Slim Type Mounting Plate 00 0 cece eee eee eee 13 7 FPO Flat Type Mounting Plate 0 cece eee 13 8 Detailed Specifications of Cables 0 13 9 Connection between RS232C port and PC 13 10 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 14 3 14 1 1 Table of System Registers for FPO 14 5 14 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FPO 14 17 14 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FPO 14 20 14 2 Table of Basic Instructions iei 14 30 14 3 Table of High level Instructions 0
323. y is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion I O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 3 19 Expansion I O Units FPO 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 8 X21 COM Output Y21 Load amp Load o 9 9 Load Load me Notes e The two COM terminals of input terminals are connected internally however they should be externally connected as well 1 Either positive or negative polarity is possible for the input voltage supply e The I O number given above is the I O number when the expansion l O unit is installed as the first expansion unit The I O numbers for the expansion I O units will differ depending on the location where they are installed section 5 3 FPO Expansion I O Units 3 4 Pin Layouts 3 4 4 E16P X20 X21 COM COM Y20 Y21 e The two COM te

User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents